Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager. Imagine communications ADC Device Server and Config Tool
إعلان
إعلان
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configuring Devices using
Configuration Manager
About Device Types
Devices supported by the Automation system generally fall into one of two categories: media devices and non-media devices. Media devices include any devices that can be assigned to a list, have a storage collection of available media, and have the ability to cue and play media. Non-media devices are devices that perform other functions within the automation system. The following descriptions refer to software objects within the automation system that control the actual devices.
Media Devices
Media devices may be categorized as one of two types within the Automation system: physical media devices and virtual media devices. Media devices have a number of common characteristics including:
• A storage collection of available media
• Assignment to a list (or several lists, in the case of multiple-stream devices)
• Ability to cue media
• Ability to play or record media
• One or more "media heads" (I/O streams)
Physical Media Devices
Video Server Encoder and Decoder Ports
Virtual Media Devices
Switch-Only Devices
VTRs
Cart Machines
Still Stores
Character Generators
GMT Requesters
GMT Distributors
Demo Devices
Audio Disk Carts
Serial Devices
Video Effect Devices
VChip Encoders
Physical Media Devices: These are devices that physically exist within the broadcast control room and are controlled through an RS-422 serial or GPI connection. The configuration GUIs for software objects that the automation uses to control these devices contain a Serial Port tab for designating the serial port the Device Server will use to communicate with the device.
Virtual Media Devices: These devices exist only as software objects and perform special functions within the automation system.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 31
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Switch-Only devices switch a designated source to a designated destination on a switcher or router when their device name is placed in the ID column of a Transmission list
• GMT Requesters are special GMT components that request missing media to populate a playout device.
• GMT Distributors are special GMT components that distribute media from a source device at the request of a Requester.
• Demo Devices simulate the behavior of certain physical media devices. Demo Devices are used primarily for testing, diagnostics and demonstration purposes.
Storage Collection of Available Media
All media devices have a storage collection of available media. This storage collection is maintained in the Device Server’s RAM as the application is running. The storage collection for a device may consist of one ID or many IDs. Mass-storage devices, such as video servers and cart machines, may have storage collections consisting of hundreds or thousands of IDs. Single-stream devices, such as VTRs, have storage collections that consist of either one ID (if a tape has been loaded into the VTR), or no IDs (if the VTR is empty).
The storage collections for mass storage devices may be viewed from the Device Storage window in either the Air Client or Media Client application.
Media Head
A media head is a software representation or abstraction of the I/O stream to or from a media device. A single-stream device, such as a VTR, has a single media head. A VTR is capable of playing out only one piece of media at a time. A multi-stream device, such as a cart machine, has as many media heads as there are VTRs available within the cart machine. Each VTR may produce a separate audio/video stream simultaneously.
A video server encoder or decoder port is abstracted in the software as a two-headed device because of its ability to play out (or record) a continuous stream of audio and video. A decoder port may be thought of as analogous to a cart machine with two VTRs – while one VTR is playing out, the other has the next media cued. While one of the decoder port’s media heads is playing out, the other media head has the next clip cued.
Switch-Only devices have eight media heads. A Switch-Only device may be configured with eight ID names, each representing a crosspoint on a router or switcher. All eight heads may be cued simultaneously on a list.
Non-Media Devices
Non-media devices behave differently than media devices. Non-media devices:
Are not assigned to lists
Are shared by all lists
Do not have storage collections
Cannot cue, play or record
Do not have "media heads"
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 32
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Like media devices, non-media devices may be controlled through an RS-422 serial connection. Some of the non-media devices supported by the automation system include:
• Routers and switchers are the most common types of non-media devices. Routers and switchers
(including master control switchers) are not assigned to lists. Instead, they are shared by all lists through the audio/video routing tables (A/V tables) configured for each device on each list.
• Barcode readers or barcode wands are used to identify tapes by a barcode label.
Special Device Types
A few device types supported by the Automation system do not fall into the categories of either media or non-media devices. They have some of the characteristics of media devices, but are never assigned to a list. They include the following types:
• Archives, archive managers and archive systems are controlled though an Ethernet connection, rather than a point-to-point RS-422 serial connection.
• ProxyFTP Devices are software gateways the automation system uses to initiate FTP file transfers between video servers over a wide area network (WAN).
• Database Update Redirectors are software devices that propagate changes to database records to events on lists running on multiple Device Servers.
Note: All devices, whether they are media devices, non-media devices or the special devices described above, must be assigned to a device channel in the Configured Devices window of the Configuration
Manager.
About Device Control
Devices supported by the Automation system may be controlled by one of several means: a point-topoint RS-422 serial connection, an Ethernet connection on a local area network, or by a GPI trigger.
RS-422 Control
Physical media devices are generally controlled though a point-to-point RS-422 serial connection.
Different devices utilize different command protocols for their serial control. Video server ports on all makes and models of servers are controlled using VDCP (Video Disk Communication Protocol). VTRs are typically controlled using Sony VTR protocol. Other devices are controlled using their manufacturer’s native command protocols.
Depending on the requirements of the command protocol, devices may be polled periodically for status updates. Video server ports, for example, are polled every frame for port status and every 8 seconds
(approx.) for system status. Sony VTRs are polled every frame for an update of the current timecode position. Other devices are not polled but sent commands only when they are called upon to perform some action.
Serial boards in the Device Server contain serial communication status LEDs that indicate the current status of the board. On the top edge of each serial board are banks of three LEDs corresponding to the eight RS-422 serial ports on the board (1 bank of eight LEDS for an 8-port card, 2 banks of eight LEDs for a serial 16 card). These LEDs are only visible by removing the Device Server’s cover.
• The green LED indicates that there is data being transmitted to the device from the Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 33
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• The yellow LED indicates that there is data being received by the Device Server from the controlled device.
• The red LED indicates that a communications error has occurred. Only a mismatch in the communication parameters configured for the device (Baud rate, parity, stop bits, data bits) will cause this LED to illuminate.
Depending on the types of devices connected to the serial board, the transmit and receive LEDs either solidly illuminate or intermittently illuminate. The communications error LED will illuminate upon the first occurrence of an error and remain illuminated until normal communications are established.
For most devices supported by the Automation system, the communication parameters are not configurable within the Configuration Manager. The devices themselves must be configured to match the automation system’s requirements.
8 Port Serial Card LEDs
On the rear panel of the 8-port serial card, visible from the outside of the Device Server, are three summary status LEDs. These LEDs are a summary of the eight sets of LEDs on the top edge of the board.
A communications error on any one of the eight serial ports will cause this LED to illuminate.
8-port serial board (rear)
16 port Serial Card LEDs
Transmit, Receive, and Error indications are available for each of the 16 ports via green, yellow, and red
LEDs respectively. Global Transmit and Receive LEDs are visible thru the rear bracket.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 34
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
16-port serial board (top)
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Ethernet Control
Archives and archive systems are controlled through a separate Ethernet connection to the archive manager. The Device Server contains a second network interface, bound to TCP/IP protocol, which may be used to connect the Device Server to the local area network for the archive system.
Reference Note: Installation of Device Server uses TCP/IP on two separate LAN’s, one for Automation
Hardware Control (IPv6), and one for the SQL Database interaction (TCP/IPv4). It is recommended to use
TCP/IPv4 with a 2nd NIC installed into Clients for the SQL interaction.
Archive system without bridge computer
Device Controller /
Device Server
<VACP over TCP/IPv4 >
Archive
< TCP/IPv6 >
Archive
Manager
Air Client
Archive system with bridge computer
Media Client
Another optional archive control architecture involves the use of a bridge computer. The bridge computer serves as a gateway between the Device Server and the archive system. It contains two network interfaces, one bound to TCP/IP protocol for connection to the automation LAN, and one bound to TCP/IP protocol for connection to the archive system LAN. The bridge computer runs a separate instance of the Device Server application with a single device configured: the archive device.
This architecture separates the functions of the Device Server’s devices and the archive device, and frees the TCP/IP network interface in the Device Server for other purposes.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 35
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• The Automation system uses the Video Archive Communication Protocol (VACP) to control archive systems. This command protocol is widely supported by archive system manufacturers.
• FTP file transfers between video servers on a wide area network may be controlled through an
Ethernet connection as well. The ProxyFTP device may be configured with the IP addresses of any video servers on the WAN and initiate and control file transfers.
• Device Servers are shipped with IP default addresses configured for their TCP/IP network interfaces.
These IP addresses may be changed at installation time to suit the needs of your particular network.
Device Controller /
Device Server
Bridge Computer
< TCP/IPv6 >
< TCP/IPv6 >
<VACP over TCP/IPv4>
Archive
Archive
Manager
Air Client Media Client
GPI Control
Devices that cannot be controlled through a serial or Ethernet interface may be controlled using a
General Purpose Interface (GPI) trigger. A GPI is a relay contact closure that provides either a high-tolow or a low-to-high transition to trigger devices that accept this type of control. A single Device Server can support up to 32 contact closures (four GPI cards), although the standard Device Server configuration includes two GPI cards. Additional GPI cards may be purchased separately.
GPI triggers are configured in the Configuration Manager Tool as Switch-Only devices.
To Change the Config Tool Password
Use the following procedure to change the Config Tool password as required.
1. From the Config Tool menu select File > Change password.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 36
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
2. In the opened dialog enter the current/old password and the new password. Under Confirm
Password reenter the new password again.
3. Press OK.
To Start Device Configuration
The Configuration Manager Tool is used to configure the device drivers for devices controlled by a specific Device Server.
1. Highlight a Device Server and then from the main menu select File > Configured Devices OR Rightclick on the name of the Device Server, and from the pop-up menu select "Configured Devices".
2. The Configured Devices window opens to display the devices already configured and the available device drivers.
The left pane displays the available device channels. The Device Channel is not necessarily the same as RS-422 Serial Port to be used.
The right pane displays the available device drivers.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 37
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The number in parentheses next to the device type in the right pane displays the number of available device drivers for that device type.
Main Menu Options
The Configured Devices window has a number of drop-down menus available.
File menu
The File menu has the following options:
Option Select to…
Save Devices
Save Configuration
Locally
Write the current configuration to the Device Server’s configuration files in the
"C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Save the Device Server’s configuration files to an alternate location. Only the
ADC1000NT.INI and LISTCONF.INI files are saved. This allows you to back up your current configuration on a floppy disk (recommended). Choosing this option will open an Explorer window and allow you to choose where to save the files.
Print Configuration Print the Device Server’s configuration files, if you have a printer attached to the client PC (or a network printer configured).
CAUTION: The configuration files can be quite large! Be sure to have plenty of
paper in your printer.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 38
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Option
Clocking
Select to…
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the system reference clock for the Device Server. In the Clocking
Information dialog, select the appropriate type of clock input your system will be using (SMPTE timecode, Video Sync, or the Device Server’s internal PC clock), the correct frame rate (NTSC – 30 fps, or PAL – 25 fps), and if you are using dropframe or non-drop-frame timecode.
Delete
Properties
Diagnostics
Delete the selected device from its device channel.
Open the configuration GUI for the selected device.
Open a modeless diagnostics logging window for the selected device. For more information see Diagnostics and Troubleshooting.
Note: This option is only available for certain types of devices (GMT Distributors,
Archives, ProxyFTP devices).
Close Close the Configured Devices window.
Edit menu
The Edit menu has the following options:
Option
Copy
Paste
Select to…
This option is not currently available. (use the keyboard shortcut CTL+C)
This option is not currently available (use the keyboard shortcut CTL+V)
View menu
The View menu has the following options:
Option
Large Icons
Select to…
Display large icons in the left pane of the Configured Devices window.
Details
Device Status
Displays device details in the left pane of the Configured Devices window.
Open the Device Status window. This window displays the real-time status of devices in use by the automation system.
Open a window that displays the devices in order of serial port number. Port Usage
Connections Open a window that displays all of the Device Servers and client applications currently logged into this Device Server
GPI Card 1 (2, 3, 4) Open a diagnostic utility for testing the GPI cards in the Device Server. Opening the appropriate GPI card window and placing a check in a checkbox will close the relay contacts for the corresponding GPI output.
Refresh Refresh the display in the Configured Devices window.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 39
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Help menu
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The Help menu has the following options:
Option
About…
Help
Select to…
Launch a dialog displaying version and copyright information of the currently selected Device Server.
Launch the help file.
To close a hung API connection from Config Tool
A hung API connection can be closed from the Configuration Tool View Connections window with any remote application (not only hung) via a right-click menu option so that a hung API connection does not require a Device Server reboot.
Use the following procedure to close a Device Server connection.
1. From the Config Tool Main menu select File > Connection Management. The Connections window is displayed showing all connections made via the automation Network to this Device Server.
2. Right click on a connection.A 'Disconnect' option is displayed. Click the option to close the Device
Server connection.
To configure the System Reference Clock
(Clocking)
Use the following procedure to configure the system reference clock for the Device Server.
1. From the ADCNT Configuration screen, right-click on the name of a listed Device Server. A pop-up menu is displayed.
2. From the pop-up menu select "Configured Devices." The Configured Devices window opens to display the devices already configured and the available device drivers for that Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 40
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
3. On the Configured Devices window, from the main menu select File > Clocking. The Clocking dialog is displayed.
4. Source: Select the appropriate type of clock input connected to your system:
PC: The Device Server’s internal PC clock
SYNC: The house Video Sync reference
TC: For local timecode generator
Chronos: For Chronos PTP reference. This option must be selected If using Chronos PTP timing.
The Source title will change to reflect the connected input.
Note: With ADC v12.19 and higher the default Source - PC setting is Time Code.
Note: If no sources are connected, the Source title will always revert to "- PC".
Note: If running multiple Device Servers and PC Clock is selected as Source, the clocks must be manually synchronized.
Note: For the NEXIO AMP select SYNC.
IMPORTANT: The Time Code Source used (e.g. timecode generator) must be set to 24 hour format.
(See also About Device Server Clocking (on page 42).)
Note: If no sources are connected, the Source title will always revert to "- PC".
5. Rate: Select the correct frame rate (NTSC – 30 fps, or PAL – 25 fps).
6. Drop Frame: If you are using timecode to clock the system, select whether the timecode source is drop-frame or non-drop-frame timecode. (See also About Drop Frame / Non Drop Frame Settings
7. Round DF: Select (enable) the round drop frame parameter if you want to force the play list timing to always be accurate with respect to Time of Day, when using NTSC drop frame (DF).
Without Rounded DF checked in NTSC timing mode, the drop frame follows the rule from RS-
170A, in the full minute. If an event’s duration is not a full minute, the drop frame is ignored for the segment smaller than a minute.
With Rounded DF checked in NTSC timing mode, all the event duration segments smaller than 1 minute are accumulated to a full minute and then drop frame is implemented. This makes the timing more accurate.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 41
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
8. (Optional) Date: Change the current date. The date can be changed while the Device Server application is running. When the date drop down is selected, a calendar view is presented, with the currently set date noted. The correct date can be selected by highlighting it. If necessary, the arrow controls can be used to select the month.
About PC Clock Date: When the Device Server application if first launched, the PC clock's date is used to determine the date. However, since the Device Server uses an external reference to maintain it’s clocking—typically house timecode—the point at which the day is incremented cannot be maintained using the PC clock. Therefore the date is incremented whenever the Device Server's clocking passes through 00:00:00:00. Under certain circumstances, the date may become out of sync with the actual date. This has no effect on the execution of events, but affects certain processes such as AsRuns.
9. When finished click Apply and then click OK.
About Drop Frame / Non Drop Frame Settings
The Drop Frame or Non Drop Frame settings must be correctly set across the system.
• If the Drop Frame (DF) option is set to ON, and Drop Frame is received, then DF is shown in BLACK in the Device Server window and in the Client's transmission windows.
• If the Drop Frame (DF) option is set to OFF, and Drop Frame is received, then DF is shown in RED in the Device Server window and in the Client's transmission windows.
• If the Drop Frame (DF) option is set to ON, and Non Drop Frame is received, then NDF is shown in
RED in the Device Server window and in the Client's transmission windows.
• If the Drop Frame (DF) option is set to OFF, and Non Drop Frame is received, then NDF is shown in
BLACK in the Device Server window and in the Client's transmission windows.
To see NDF in Black, genlock the system with Timecode, select NDF in the configuration, AND ensure the clock being fed to the Device Server is NDF.
About Device Server Clocking
If the Source option selected in the configuration (PC Clock, SYNC, TimeCode, or Chronos) is available, it is shown in BLACK in the Device Server window and in the Client's transmission windows. The Source title on the Clocking Information dialog will change to reflect the connected input.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 42
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If a selected Source option is not available, then the next available option is shown in RED on the
Clocking Information dialog, according to the source initially selected. These sequences are described below.
Note: Timecode and Sync are high priority (with Timecode higher than Sync) and – if either are connected – will always take precedence over PC Clock.
Sequence 1:
If TIMECODE is selected and is connected to the Device Server, it is shown in BLACK. If it is not connected to the Device Server, then SYNC is shown in RED - if it is connected. If SYNC is not connected either, then PC CLOCK (PC) is shown in RED.
Selected
Source
1
Timecode
2
Connected to Device
Server
2b
NO
2a
YES
Selected
Source
(Timecode)
Shown in
BLACK
Sync
3
Connected to Device
Server
3b
NO
PC Clock
3a
YES
Source
Shown in
RED
4
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 43
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Sequence 2:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If SYNC is selected and is connected to the Device Server, it is shown in BLACK. If it is not connected to the Device Server, then TIMECODE is shown in RED - if it is connected. If TIMECODE is not connected either, then PC CLOCK (PC) is shown in RED.
Selected
Source
1
Sync
2
Connected to Device
Server
2b
NO
Timecode
3
Connected to Device
Server
3b
NO
PC Clock
2a
YES
Selected
Source
(Sync)
Shown in
BLACK
3a
YES
Source
Shown in
RED
4
Sequence 3:
If PC CLOCK is selected and either Timecode and / or Sync are also connected, the system will revert to the highest priority connected source and that source will be shown in RED. If neither are connected, then PC CLOCK (PC) is shown in BLACK.
Selected
Source
1
PC Clock
2
Timecode
3
Connected to Device
Server
3b
NO
Sync
4
3a
YES
Source -“”
Shown in
RED
4a
YES
Connected to Device
Server
4b
NO
Selected
Source
(PC Clock)
Shown in
BLACK
About Consuming Chronos Timings over a Network
Chronos is a utility developed by Imagine Communications that implements IEEE 1588-2008 Precision
Time Protocol (PTPv2) and SMPTE 2059 to provide SMPTE timecode over a network to playout systems that do not have hardware inputs on which to receive LTC.
ADC v12.23 and higher support Chronos via the SMPTE API clocking type.
• This functionality worked in 12.23 to 12.25 versions by having the dll’s copied in the C:\Server folder.
• With ADC 12.25M when the Chronos clocking option is selected, the ADC Device Server looks to the hardcoded path where Chronos is installed. This ensures the proper dlls are always referenced for the version of Chronos installed.
Note: The legacy clock is kept as a fall back design for compatibility of time code card reader.
IMPORTANT: This feature has been tested and released using the Chronos PTP clock generator.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 44
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
About Installation
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Chronos is installed and configured using its own utilities. For details see the Chronos Installation and
Setup Reference.
When Chronos is installed on a 64-bit OS, it writes files into two directories:
/Program Files: Service and 64-bit version of dlls
/Program Files (x86): 32-bit version of dlls
The hardcoded install path is %ProgramFiles%\Imagine Communications\Chronos. The Device Server uses the ProgramFiles environment variable that points to the right folder at the right disk.
For example:
On a 32-bit OS, the Device Server will look into "C:\Program Files\Imagine
Communications\Chronos" directory.
On a 64-bit OS , the Device Server will look into "C:\Program Files (x86)\Imagine
Communications\Chronos" directory.
WARNING: If the install path is changed, the Device Server will not find the dlls and will not be able to use Chronos.
About Upgrade
Use the following process to upgrade the Chronos software on the system.
1. Shutdown the Device Server because Chronos libraries can be locked by Device Server.
2. Install Chronos.
3. Start the Device Server. Device Server loads ChronosClient.dll only on start up.
Note: If Chronos is not installed, but the Device Server needs to migrate to it, the Device Server can be restarted after installation of Chronos because the Device Server configured to be locked to PC, SYNC or
TIMECODE does not use any part of it.
About Configuration
With SMPTE 2059 specification, non-drop frame is not supported. When a Chronos clock is selected, on the Clocking Information dialog the "Drop Frame" and "Round DF" options are grayed out. Their default values are "Drop Frame ON" and "Round DF OFF".
1. Run the Device Server.
2. Run the Configuration Tool.
3. On the configuration tool window, select the icon for the running Device Server.
4. Right click to select the item menu "Configured Devices" to open a window.
5. On the window of "Configured Devices", select [File | Clocking] menu to open "Clocking
Information" window.
6. Select "SMPTE API" option and then click Apply.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 45
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
7. Observe that ‘Chronos’ is displayed as a caption on the Device Server screen, to indicate that the clock type is Chronos.
Operation
ADC can register a handle in a Chronos network clock, and be signaled by the clock at the beginning of each frame period. ADC response is a signal to retrieve a corresponding FILETIME record from the clock.
The signals are used to trigger running an interrupt routine of an ADC Device Server application. The
FILETIME record can be converted to a clock record used by ADC software.
1. Run a new automation client application (Air Client or Playlist v5) with connection to the Device
Server.
2. Open the "Device Status" window and observe that a letter ‘C’ is displayed on the bottom display row to indicate that the clock type is of Chronos.
3. Assign a disk (e.g. demo disk) to a play list and load a list of demo disk events.
4. Open the List window and run the playlist.
5. The Chronos clock is displayed on the bottom row, as well as a letter ‘C’ to indicate clock type of
Chronos.
To Configure GPI Control
The GPI configuration GUI provides Enhanced GPI Triggering with ADC. The primary aspects of this functionality include:
• The GPI inputs extended to encompass all 32 inputs.
Note: Versio v1.01 only encompasses 8 GPI inputs.
• The ability to configure the action taken for each input.
• The ability to select Single or multiple Lists for each GPI. (i.e. the equivalent of gang rolled functionality).
• The default configuration matches the existing fixed functionality.
IMPORTANT: This GPI configuration is independent of the GPI configuration for Switch Only devices.
IMPORTANT: For this feature to be enabled, ini files generated by versions 11.55 or higher must be utilized. Ini files created by previous versions do not contain the necessary configuration settings for correct operations. Please contact ADC Technical Support if you would like to utilize this feature.
IMPORTANT RECCOMMENDATION: Wait at least one minute before applying power to the Device
Server CHP after a shut-down. This allows sufficient time for the capacitor or capacitors to discharge, at which point the circuitry is inactive on restart, and prevents transient functions, such as GPI firing.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 46
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
GPI Card Status: For information on checking the status and functionality of GPI cards installed in the
Device Server see GPI diagnostics.
WARNING ABOUT GPI CARD SETTINGS: For North American customers using IconStation, Input GPI 1 is reserved for EAS that is controlled by the IconStation, and Input GPIs 2-8 are available for ADC. For more
information see GPI Card Support (on page 48).
To Configure Enhanced GPI Triggering
1. From the Configuration Tool’s main menu select File > GPI Input Configuration. The GPI Input configuration screen is displayed and provides easy viewing of all GPIs at a glance.
2. On the GPI Input configuration screen configure the following parameters as required:
Action: Specify the action for a specific GPI: The drop down menu for the Action field offers all
Playlist Control Panel options. These include: Run, Ready, Play, Hold, Skip, Tension Release,
Freeze, Roll, Unthread, Protect, Add, Recue, Sub, Cut Next, Roll Secondary, Play to Next, and
Skip to Next.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 47
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
List: Select the Lists to which the GPI will issue a command. Single or multiple Lists can be selected (checked) for each GPI. A single GPI can issue a command to multiple lists- with the limitation that only a single command can be selected. This is the equivalent of gang rolled functionality.
GPI Card Support
Device Server v12.20.24/v12.19.33.0M includes three adapters for communication with: standard PCI
SeaLevel GPI card, GPI ports of AB4 card (directly), and LLM (by TCP/IP). It is possible to change/configure this adapter type by modifying the ADC1000NT.ini file.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 48
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To Change/Configure the GPI Adapter/Device Type
Use the following procedure to change/configure the GPI Adapter/Device Type in the ADC1000NT.ini file.
1. Using a text editor, such as WordPad, open ADC1000NT.ini. (This file is located in the Device Server installation folder.)
If there is no ADC1000NT.ini file in the Device Server folder…
• Launch Device Server and Config Tool
• Open Configured Devices window in the Config Tool and click Save on the Devices menu
• ADC1000NT.ini is created in the Device Server folder
2. Locate the "GPI Driver configuration" section in the .ini file.
3. Change "GPI Driver type" value. Possible values are:
0: (Default) PCI SeaLevel GPI card.
ADC GPI functionality works when the GPI Driver type is set to 0 with the standard build of ADC
Device Server v12.20.24 and a SeaLevel card.
1: GPI ports of AB4 card (direct communication).
ADC GPI functionality works when the GPI Driver type is set to 1 with Versio Device Server v12.19.33.0M and the NEXIO and IconStation are off.
2: LLM by TCP/IP.
ADC GPI functionality works when the GPI Driver type is set to 2 with Versio Device Server v12.19.33.0M and the NEXIO and IconStation are running. Input GPI 1 invokes the configured action for ADC, but also starts any GPI configured in IconStation.
WARNING: For North American customers using IconStation, Input GPI 1 is reserved for EAS that is controlled by the IconStation, and Input GPIs 2-8 are available for ADC.
4. When finished, save the ADC1000NT.ini file.
Use External Network Attached GPI/O Hardware
ADCv12.23 and higher allows the Device Server to use external network attached GPI/O hardware (e.g. the SeaLevel 410E).
• The ADC system is able to operate with or without one or more 410E devices.
• The ADC system usage of the 410E devices is based upon the compiler directives {$IFDEF
USE_SEALEVELIP} and {$IFNDEF USE_SEALEVELIP} as implemented in the ADC POC.
• The ADC system is able to operate per current production level GPI functionality with one or more
410E devices when built with the compiler directive USE_SEALEVELIP defined.
• The ADC system is able to operate per current production level GPI functionality without one or more 410E devices when built without the compiler directive USE_SEALEVELIP defined.
• The slave ID is a configurable value that the Device Server can read and pass to the initialize procedure. The SeaMax API function SM_SelectDevice requires a Slave ID parameter in order to distinguish between Modules.
The Slave ID is configured on the module’s physical casing by moving the ADDR dial. If the ADDR dial is set to 0, the Slave ID is 247. Otherwise, the Slave ID is the non-0 position on the dial.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 49
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To indicate that device is not present, when configuring SeaMAX GPI in ADC1000NT.INI configuration file, use SlaveID = -1.
For example, the following configuration indicates that only one SeaMAX device is present:
[GPI Driver Configuration]
SeaIO410E_ADDRESS=192.168.19.49
SeaIO410E_SLAVEID1=2
SeaIO410E_SLAVEID2=-1
Type=3
Alternatively, to indicate that second device is not present, do not specify second SlaveID:
[GPI Driver Configuration]
SeaIO410E_ADDRESS=192.168.19.49
SeaIO410E_SLAVEID1=2
Type=3
To configure skipping a commercial break after a GPI (input)
ADC Device Server functionality allows skipping a commercial break after receiving a contact closure input. The following two GPI Input options are used to configure this action: "Play to Next" and ’Skip to
Next". These options work together with the "Contact Start" option of a transmission list.
Note: The "Play to Next" and ’Skip to Next" options work together with the "Contact Start" option of a transmission list.
When a transmission list plays an up-count event and a GPI closure is received…
• The Up count event rolls to the next event.
• This new feature allows rolling out of the commercial break back to the next N event.
For example, in a playlist with the following events:
AU LIVE
A SPOT1
A SPOT2
A SPOT3
AUN LIVE
If a GPI is received any time in between the AU LIVE event, in any of the SPOT1, 2 or 3, the transmission list, skips all the SPOT 1, 2, 3 and mark MISSED, and starts playing the next N event - similar to having a hard started the U LIVE Event, but instead of a fixed time (AO) it is started with a
GPI trigger.
In Operation
• The event modifier - "N" Time-to-next event type - marks where to jump. This allows the user to define arbitrary points: segmented or non-segments, up-count or not and so on.
• Time-to-next event must be in look ahead.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 50
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• The events that are skipped when receiving a GPI input are marked as MISSED.
• Skip-to-next mark all events between current and time-to-next as MISSED. The Current event is skipped.
• Play-to-next marks all events between current and time-to-next as MISSED. The Current event will finish playing and then time-to-next event will start playing.
• If current event is up-count event type, the Play-to-next signal is processed as Skip-to-next.
• If time-to-next event is not cued, the playlist tries to thread and cue it.
• If any error occurs (N event is absent or cannot be threaded), it is displayed on client side and the playlist will continue playing events in normal order not skipping any event.
Note: This functionality applies only to a GPI input. It does not apply to a function available on the Air
Client Software/Hardware control panel. That is, this functionality is not available on the Air Client software panel nor the Air Client hardware panel.
To Configure this functionality
1. From the Configuration Tool’s main menu select File > GPI Input Configuration. The GPI Input configuration screen is displayed and provides easy viewing of all GPIs at a glance.
2. On the GPI Input configuration screen configure the following parameters as required:
Action: Specify the action for a specific GPI: The drop down menu for the Action field offers all
Playlist Control Panel options. For this enhancement select "Play to Next" or’ Skip to Next".
• Skip-to-next marks all events between current and time-to-next as MISSED. The Current event is skipped.
• Play-to-next marks all events between current and time-to-next as MISSED. The Current event will finish playing and then time-to-next event will start playing.
• If the current event is an up-count event type, the Play-to-next signal is processed as Skipto-next.
List: Select the Lists to which the GPI will issue a command. Single or multiple Lists can be selected (checked) for each GPI. A single GPI can issue a command to multiple lists- with the limitation that only a single command can be selected. This is the equivalent of gang rolled functionality.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 51
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To configure Sync Skip after a GPI (input)
The SyncSkip mechanism provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. GPI triggers were expanded to support SyncSkip command by adding a SyncSkip action to the GPI Input
Configuration in the Config Tool.
To Configure this functionality
1. From the Configuration Tool’s main menu select File > GPI Input Configuration. The GPI Input configuration screen is displayed and provides easy viewing of all GPIs at a glance.
2. On the GPI Input configuration screen configure the following parameter as required:
Action: Specify the action for a specific GPI: The drop down menu for the Action field offers all
Playlist Control Panel options. For this enhancement select "SyncSkip".
• With this action selected, if an appropriate GPI signal is received and the SyncSkip command is chosen, the SyncSkip list action is performed.
List: Select the Lists to which the GPI will issue a command. Single or multiple Lists can be selected (checked) for each GPI. A single GPI can issue a command to multiple lists- with the limitation that only a single command can be selected. This is the equivalent of gang rolled functionality.
Basic Functionality
The SyncSkip command is applied to primary events only under the following conditions:
• Type of current playing event should be AN – time-to-next.
• Current event should have non-blank segment number in segment column.
• There should be another event down the list within lookahead meeting such requirements:
The same ID as current playing event.
The same type – AN
Non-blank segment number.
Segment number should be one more than segment number of current playing event, i.e. segments should be sequential.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 52
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If the conditions are satisfied, the SyncSkip action can be performed.
In other cases this command is replaced with simple Skip.
Note: Each of two events for SyncSkip (current and next) should represent the same entire program, with the same DUR and SOM, i.e. there should be 2 identical events in the transmission list.
To Set Device Server ‘Keep Alive Time’
The Keep Alive Time specifies the Device Server’s network timeout .This parameter can be dynamically updated from the Config Tool and applied immediately (without having to restart the Device Server).
Use the following procedure to configure the special "Networking" form from the Config Tool’s
Configure Devices dialog. This option allows specifying the Keep Alive Time configuration and to change
Keep Alive Time value dynamically according to user’s choice.
1. From the Config Tool’s Configure Devices dialog, select File > Networking. A Networking dialog is displayed.
2. On the Networking dialog specify the Keep Alive Time (in seconds).
Minimal value is 3 seconds.
Maximum value – 3600 seconds.
3. When finished click OK.
The system checks if a specified Keep-Alive interval is valid before saving it. Entering an incorrect value causes the Keep-Alive value edit visual control to change its color to white on red while the OK button becomes disabled.
The value:
Is automatically saved to "Network.ini" file (as currently) and restored after server restart.
Immediately affects the server’s network timeout without the necessity to restart server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 53
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To Assign a Device to a Device Channel
1. Display Device Drivers: To display the specific device driver, click on the ⊞ symbol next to a device type. This expands the tree to display the specific device drivers for that device that are available in the system. (e.g. VTRs expanded would list Sony, Ampex, etc.)
2. Select the specific device in the right pane with the mouse, and then drag-and-drop the device on a device channel in the left pane. The number to the left of the device in parentheses decrements by one to indicate one less device driver is available.
3. Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
(Option) To Remove a Device from a Device Channel
Use the following procedure to remove a device from a device channel.
1. Select the device you wish to remove.
2. Right-click on the entry and from the popup menu select Remove (or use the keyboard DEL key).
The device is removed from the device channel and is made available for assignments to another channel.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 54
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Video Disk Configuration (VDCP Driver)
The following is an example video disk configuration for VDCP type drivers. Your device may have slightly different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
IMPORTANT Note: Due to significant differences in configuration screens, configurations for API/IP
Video Disk drivers are addressed under their own section. For details seeVideo Disk Configuration
(API/IP driver) (see "DTP Insertion Driver" on page 74).
To Configure a Video Disk (VDCP Driver)
1. Under Video Disk Servers (VDCP) in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a
Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Video Disk device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. Available options may differ depending on the device selected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. The default name for standard video disks is DISK. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name. (See ID Match Name below.)
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 55
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options.
• Stop Disk Play/Record on Init: A stop command is issued to the disk whenever the Device
Server is started or the port is re-initialized. When disabled, the Device Server connects to the video disk port if it can. If it cannot, the port must manually be re-initialized on the
Device Server (under System, Diagnostics). When disabled, it is the operator’s responsibility to check the port status in the Device Status Window and the IDs in the Device Storage
Window and re-initialize if required. Default is enabled (checked).
Note: Some sites prefer to DISABLE on ports the play to Air, and also Auto Record List ports.
• Back to Back Play: When performing back to back play of short spots (for example, five second spots), keep the preroll and postroll of the lists as short as possible. The postroll time must be compatible with the VTR, switcher and effect minimum postroll times. Also, the
ADC Device Server allows a video disk that has started cueing to continue cueing during preroll as long as cueing finishes before playout time. If disabled, the second head status line never threads (staying offline). This option should typically be left enabled. Default is enabled (checked).
• Update Event Durations From Disk: The ADC Device Server reads from the video disk the duration of every item in the disk. This duration is displayed at the Device Storage window.
The ADC Device Server shortens the duration of any event that is longer than what is reported from the disk. This feature is not typically needed for normal on-air operations since the automation database has the exact durations. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Report Spot Shorter than Scheduled: Becomes available when "Update Event Durations
From Disk" is selected. Check to enable report.
• Reset registered IDs on Init: Check to retain any registered IDs in the storage collection and clear any unused spots when the device is reinitialized.
Unchecked: Continue to use the old storage collection after the reconnection.
Recommendation: Uncheck if the disk frequently looses communication.
Disable heart beat checking for device air protection: Enable/Disable heartbeat check.
Checked: The Driver will not check if the device lost heart beat.
Unchecked: The driver will sense the lost heart beat error and try to reset and reconnect with the device.
Recommendation: Uncheck unless the device can’t reply to the driver’s heart beat checking query command.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 56
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to specify the serial COM port on which the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select the Ports tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Video Input Port In Disk. (Default: 1, Range: No Port (0) to 127) The video port number in the video disk that the automation serial board port logs into. The video input port number you enter depends on the disk system being used. Input ports are used for recording. Typically, only one video port is assigned to a list. A value of ‘No Port’ closes the video port and makes it available to another communications port.
This must be configured for a video port number that is available in the video disk for the disk to record. ‘No Port’ in the port number: it cannot record and the status is OFFLINE. The disk port
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 57
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager should only be configured to ‘No Port’ if the port is not to be used for recording, or you want to
CLOSE the port so another controller’s communication port can take control of that video port number. Normally this should have the same value as the VIDEO OUTPUT PORT if not zero (No
Port).
Video Output Port In Disk. (Default: 1, Range: No Port (0) to 127) The video output port is typically the same as the input port. The output board is used for playout. This is the video port number in the video disk that the automation serial board port logs into. Typically, only one video port is assigned to a list. A value of 0 closes the video port and makes it available to another communications port.
Normally, each video disk uses a unique number to specify which video port to use for playing.
This must be configured for a video port number that is available in the video disk for the disk to play. A zero in the port number specifies no port (disabling play). The status is OFFLINE if configured to zero. Only configure the disk port to zero if the port is not to be used for playing, or to CLOSE the port so another controller’s communication port can take control of that video port number. When not zero, this typically has the same value as the VIDEO INPUT PORT.
Note: A single disk port can only play or record at a given time (not both). ADC changes from input to output port and back when required, but will not change until it has finished its current task and is in STANDBY. For example it can be scheduled to record a news feed for an hour, then play that news program the next hour on the same port providing there is at least 10 seconds
(disk dependent) from the time it ends recording to the time it is scheduled to begin play out. If play out must begin sooner, or during recording, then use a different disk port of that video disk to play out the news that is recorded.
Close Disk Port When Not In Use. The default is disabled. This feature is rarely used. It should only be enabled when the disk port is used by different controllers at different times. A television station might use it so the day shift plays out from the disk port and the night shift records new material into the port (This, however, is limiting because if a spot needs to be recorded into the disk during the day, the port is busy for playout).
Disk To Use As Storage Port. Default is Self. Select a disk to be used for storing clips. Typically this is the same disk being configured.
Additional Port Of Same Disk. Default: None (not used). This device parameter is only used when you want to assign two video ports from the same video disk to the same play list.
There are only two situations where this is useful: (1) To do mixed effects from one piece of material in the disk to the next piece of material in the disk. This situation requires two different video ports from the same disk because two streams of simultaneous video are needed to do the mix. (2) To play spots smaller than Preroll + Postroll + 10 frames + disk cue time. In this situation two ports can allow the next port to get cued and ready simultaneously thus allowing a very short spot to play and the next event will be cued on the other port.
To configure two video disk ports from the same disk to the same list:
Assign both disk ports to the list as primary ports (air disk ports) not as protect ports.
In this parameter of each of the two ports, select the name of the disk of the other ports. This allows the list to control both ports, but the first port will think it can play all the material.
When the list asks the first port to cue the events on the list, the first disk port, knowing it has a pointer to an additional disk port, only threads every other event. It then passes the other events to the additional port for threading.
Use the same procedure to configure two protect disks, each protecting one of the air disk ports. Thus, when loading a playlist with four disk events and pressing program run you will see:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 58
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Additional ports of same video disk
EVENT# DEVICE STATUS
3
4
1
2
Disk1:1
Disk2:1
Disk1:2
Disk2:2
Cued
Cued
Stop
Stop
PROTECT
DEVICE
Disk 3:1
Disk4:1
Disk3:2
Disk4:2
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
PROTECT
STATUS
Cued
Cued
Stop
Stop
ID
SPTA
SPTB
SPTC
SPTC
When configured this way, any editing within or before any threaded and cued events, and all events below the edit point, are ejected and rethreaded in the proper order. This assures that playout toggles ports for every other event.
6. Select the Prerolls/Postrolls tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Instant Prerolls.
The Instant feature is designed for coming out of a live or upcounting event as fast as possible when the next event has a near instant preroll. If using a master control switcher, the preroll must not be shorter than the shortest preroll supported by the switcher.
• Use Instant Prerolls. This function has a default of zero seconds, four frames. The values can range from four frames to 59 seconds. Instant Preroll provides instant play/skip capability to the device. When enabled, Instant Play Preroll is activated by pressing the Instant button or
Roll Now button on the control panel.
The preroll must be set to at least the minimum switcher preroll or the disk port may start playing before the switcher switches.
The preroll also must be set to at least four frames greater than the Disk Preroll and Number of Frames to Send Play Early. Four frames is the minimum preroll allowed by ADC. If not configured properly, the list may stop, or Roll Now may not work as expected, but take a longer time than desired.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 59
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If Instant Preroll is set longer than the List Preroll, instant play is actually a delayed play. ADC operations rely on list preroll settings configured through the Options menu, in Configure
Lists.
Device Postroll.
• Use Postroll. Default: Disabled, zero seconds, four frames. Range: four frames to 59 seconds. When enabled, this setting overrides other configured postroll settings. Device postroll, if enabled, must be set to at least 4 frames.
This feature allows the list to use one postroll for VTRs, cart machines, and other devices, and a different postroll for video disks. The Device Postroll can be longer or shorter than the list postroll. Its main purpose is to clear out the disk status line quickly after the disk stops playing, so the status line can be loaded with the next event to cue. This allows small spots to be played back to back.
If the Device Postroll was set to a larger value, and the disk had over recorded the ID compared to the play duration, the disk would continue to play for the post roll duration if on air play switched to another device. This would permit mix effects during the post roll of the disk device into the play out from another device.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
Note: The Seconds and Frames values have no effect unless the Use Postroll box is enabled
(checked).
Prerolls.
• Disk Prerolls. This has a default of zero seconds. The values can range from 4 to 300 frames.
(Four frames is the minimum preroll allowed.) This feature should not be used unless specified by the disk manufacturer or Imagine Communications (refer to device-specific information).
Preroll is sent to the video disk port when initialized or configured. All play and record commands are executed at a given time after receipt of the command Disk preroll provides the preroll the disk requires for frame-accurate playout. It gives the disk more time to get the required video on air on the correct frame. Disk preroll must be set to the same value as
Number of Frames to Send Play Early (discussed below).
• Frames To Send Play Early. The default is 0 and should not need to be changed unless the disk has a fixed latency of greater than one frame for the play command. This setting determines when (number of frames) the video disk port should receive the play command before playout is performed. A setting of zero sends the play command to the disk port the frame before the command is performed.
The setting should never be greater than four frames less than List Preroll or Instant Preroll or the disk port will not play and the list will stop. If Disk Prerolls is used, the Frames setting should be the same value unless a frame or two of switcher timing compensation is required.
• Frames To Send Record Early. The default is 0 and should not need to be changed unless the disk has a fixed latency of greater than one frame for the play command. This setting determines when (number of frames) the video disk port should receive the record command before recording is performed. A setting of zero sends the record command to the disk port the frame before the command is performed. (The minimum possible value of
"Frames to send Record Early" is -300.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 60
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The setting should never be greater than four frames less than List Preroll or Instant Preroll or the disk port will not record and the list will stop. If Disk Prerolls is used, the Frames setting should be the same value unless a frame or two of switcher timing compensation is required.
Never Send DiskPreRoll Command: (Recommended only for NEXIO) Enable/Disable sending of
Disk preroll command.
Checked: The disk driver never sends the Diskpreroll Command to disk.
Unchecked: The disk driver sends the Diskpreroll command to the video disk when initialized.
Recommendation: Check only when you know the disk doesn’t support the disk PreRoll
Command.
sQ Server Note: When controlling an ISA system via the Quantel VDCP Interface, check this parameter as the sQ Server does not require and does not support disk preroll.
Always Send Preroll on Open: (Recommend only for Omneon) Enable (check)/Disable (uncheck) issuing a Preroll after opening a port.
• (Default) When Disabled (unchecked), the existing behavior is unchanged. i.e. The existing
Preroll is issued before the port open.
• When enabled (checked), a Preroll is issued immediately after every Port Open, regardless of the reason for the open, but before any other commands to the opened port.
Note: It is anticipated that this new behavior is transparent in all cases, as issuing a Preroll immediately after open should have no other effect.
7. Select the Storage tab. (Entries below are Demo Disk, Standard, and STS 10)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 61
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Automatically Delete From Disk When Full. The automation system ensures that the specified amount of free disk space is maintained. Material is deleted from the disk automatically, based on a first-entered, last-played formula.
Example: A disk has 1000 spots on it, numbered 1 through 1000. Spot 23 is played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1001. Spot 65 is then played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1002. Each time a spot is played, it is incremented using this same sequence. As a result, spots that have been on the disk the longest without ever being played have the lowest numbers, and are deleted first. If material must be deleted on the disk, the lowest number would be deleted first, then the second lowest number, then the third lowest, etc. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Spots registered in the Lookahead are never automatically deleted.
Disk Space to Keep Free (Mins). The default is 10 minutes. The range is from 0 to 32,000 minutes. This parameter attempts to keep the disk with at least the entered number of minutes of disk space free. This prevents trying to record something larger than the available amount of time, then having to delete the unfinished (truncated) item. For playout, the default value is typically used. Set this to the size of the largest ID you expect to record if Automatically Delete
From Disk When Full is enabled.
Use this parameter in time delay and record event applications. It is not recommended to set the value below four minutes (since all space available numbers are estimates due to variable rates of compression on different video images). This parameter has no effect unless
Automatically Delete From Disk When Full is enabled.
Delete IDs After Play. Check to delete a played event from the video disk. This is typically only enabled for testing or when recording for a one-time playout. Default is disabled (unchecked).
For testing, this allows a short list of spots, repeated continuously, to record or cache. The spots are then continuously deleted. For actual on-air playout, the setting automatically deletes from a disk when it is full. This keeps the disk filled with the most current spots to reduce multiple recording or caching of a spot repeated more than once. This function only deletes a spot if it is completely played out, and was recorded by this port.
Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted: Enable/Disable deletion of In-Use clips.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 62
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Checked: (Recommended) Users can’t delete an ID when it is inside the lookahead of a list from any clients.
Unchecked: Users can delete any event from the disk storage collection window of clients.
Note: When "Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted" is enabled and the "Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window" is also enabled in the "Storage Options" tab of the Air Client, attempting to delete in-use clips in the Device Storage Window results in a confirmation popup.
Clicking OK on the Confirm message will not result in these in-use clips being deleted. This applies to in-use clips that are not Protected and are not in a CUED state.
DemoDisk Storage: (Available for Demo Disk Selections) Demo Disk’s storage size can be changed by 2 parameters:
• Demodisk Leading Word and Number of IDs. The ID’s in demodisk are combined by these two parts.
For example, using the leading word of "Demo" and number "99999", allows 99,999 IDs in demodisk’s storage from Demo00001 to Demo99999.
Device uses ID request only: (For Standard, Demo, Profile, Quantel, HP Buffer, Extended ID, and
2-10 Port Video Disk) This option allows VDCP drivers to repeat 3x.16. This feature is intended for "non-standard" VDCP devices that do not support the normal storage management processes, such as the Quantel.
It enables working with devices which can use only ID request command to work with storage.
• If this option is disabled (default value), there are no changes.
• If option" is enabled, the system regularly checks all red events in the list.
Note: To have the driver recheck blue events in the list, enable the option "Update event duration from disk" on the General" tab of the configuration.
8. Select the Recording tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of record qualifiers may be used, or all may be disabled. The recording qualifiers are effective on record events and caching, and Secondary Record Device Events. This is useful in
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 63
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager caching to record only IDs that are commercials as they are short and not program material
(program material normally has a segment number). Default is disabled.
Allow Recording.
• Recording of Record Events. Allows recording of record events or other types of recordings.
When disabled, the disk port will not record. Recording with segment play enabled is equivalent to performing an insert edit or assemble record, depending on the SOM (if the video disk server supports this function).
• Back to Back Recording. For secondary record events, this parameter must be disabled.
Only enable this option if your video disk server supports this function.
This setting is useful when setting up a disk to perform continuous time delay applications.
To set this up, enable this parameter and then place a sequence of continuous IDs on a record list. The video disk records every frame into the proper ID. The record list can be made into a playlist and played out. The play output is exactly the same as what was recorded.
This function affects the play out and recording list function and the disk driver function; no other function is affected. When enabled, it: o
Allows the recording port to support back to back recording between different recording
IDs. o
The leading Switch Only Device will allow the back to back play between the different play IDs. o
The back to back recording function records single-file-multi-segment file to single file in video disk and the Air Client updates the database after each segment has finished the record. o
The recording operation to video disk will not stop until the recording of all segments is finished.
Note: Refer to the documentation on your disk to verify if your disk supports back-to-back recording.
• Record Only No Playout. When enabled, this port will not play any material. This allows a port to be assigned to a playlist for recording, with a separate port assigned for playout.
Without enabling this parameter, if one port goes down, the other port will try to do both
(record and playout). Since it cannot do both at the same time, the list will not work properly. Default is disabled.
Disable Recording With Segments. If enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Record Only Segments. Enable to only record events with non-blank segment fields. If not enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it.
Prevent Recordings Greater Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a maximum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is greater than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Prevent Recordings Less Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a minimum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is less than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Only Record Events with ID in. Check to enable, then specify the event range ’--to--‘ limits.
When enabled, the disk will only record IDs whose first character is between or equal to the limits. Numeric and alphabetic entries (upper and lower case ) are permitted.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 64
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be recorded, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To record only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters. ’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
The ID qualifier is useful where some IDs are recorded and others not, and the Duration and
Segment qualifiers cannot distinguish between them. The traffic system can designate a certain range of IDs that will be cached or recorded only.
9. Select Qualifiers tab. Use this tab to set playing event qualifiers.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled.
Playing Event Qualifiers.
Event qualifier means playlist events must satisfy the selected qualifier before being allowed to play out through this VDCP port. If they do not pass the qualifier check, the event is not registered to this port, and is not allowed to play.
• Primary Event: Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows primary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Secondary to this VDCP disk port, and register Primary events to other devices, such as VTR.
• Secondary event (without Data Event): Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows secondary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Primary to this VDCP disk port, and register Secondary events to other devices, such as VTR.
Duration Range.
If a duration qualifier is enabled then the disk port will not play any ID whose duration is greater
(or less) than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
• No Events Greater Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 65
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• No Events Less Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
ID Range.
This qualifier is useful where some IDs are to be played and others not, and the Duration qualifier cannot distinguish between them.
• Qualify Events by ID: Check to enable qualification.
• Only Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field. If this qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only play IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be played, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To play only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• No Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field. If this qualifier is enabled, then the disk will ignore IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
For example: To ignore and not play IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• from-- to --: Alphanumeric entry. specify range. Up to 32 characters can be entered in each field.
’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
10. Select Segments tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Enable Cue with Data: Enable this function only if your video disk server supports this function.
• This is only enabled to play a part of an ID. It is similar to playing segments of a program or show.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 66
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
When enabled, the disk port uses the event’s SOM (start of message) to play or record individual segments of program material. For example, enable this setting if you want to play a program or news item in several parts. However, the different video disk devices implement this feature in various ways. For further details, refer to the documentation on your video disk device. Default is disabled (unchecked).
• This feature must be enabled to play or record individual segments of program material.
(The HP AMS can only start at the beginning of the file for play and record. The Profile can start play or insert recording at any time into the file.) If the SEGMENT field in an event is not blank then the video disk can only play or record that event if this option is enabled. If you always want to start at the beginning of every ID, or your disk does not support segments, then do not enable this feature.
Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters). Up to two characters can be added to IDs. Useful for multi-segment recording, this option causes the ID on a video disk to be appended with either 1 or 2 characters to distinguish the segments.
If you never use more than 9 segments in any ID, select 1 character (which allows up to 9 segments). If you select 2 characters here, a maximum of 99 segments is allowed. Valid numbers are 0, 1, and 2. Default is 0.
Example: If Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters) were set to 2, a 3-segment ID titled "spot" would reside on the video disk as "spot01," "spot02," and "spot03." If the disk has a maximum of 32 characters allowed for an ID, the ID is truncated on the disk if the ID takes up 30 or more characters (2 characters are lost to allow for the 2 segment characters).
Segment Play Search path: Use this parameter to specify segmented program ID search through various settings of the Modify ID parameter. For media play out, the first valid setting is used.
The list permits each setting to be individually enabled or disabled, and for the order in which they are checked to be defined. Populating the search path with a single entry matching the fixed settings allows operation identical to current behavior.
Select a listed segment then use the associated buttons to arrange:
• Up / Down: Use these buttons to position the segment in the list.
• Enable: Use this buttons to enable a selected segment.
• Disable: Becomes active when Enable is selected. Use this button to disable a selected segment.
• Cue: Becomes active when Enable is selected.
• Cue with Data: Becomes active when Cue is selected
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of segments with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT. o
Default setting is disabled.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 67
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission List treats this event like any other missing event.
11. Select Spots tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of single spots with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT. o
Default setting is disabled.
• When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission List treats this event like any other missing event.
Cue Non-Segmented material with Data: Check to enable. This must be enabled to allow proper review of Multi-Segmented material. This is because in the Media Client, Segments are treated as Single-Spots for Review purpose.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 68
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
12. Select Archive tab. (For Demo Video Disk, Demo 5-Port Video Disk)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Disk Has Archive: Check to indicate the Video Disk has an associated Archive.
Backup Play From Archive: Check to enable backup of playout material from the Archive.
13. Select E to E tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Send Disk EE Mode Commands. (Default: disabled) These commands are only supported on certain video disks. Do not enable unless you are sure they are supported in your version.
When enabled, ADC NT sends EE commands to the disk when it starts and stops playing.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 69
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
This effectively makes the video disk a video player and insert switcher if the input to the port is a primary video feed, and the video disk is controlled by a ‘break away’ list. Once the video disk receives an EE command, it enters an EE controlled mode where it no longer controls the internal switcher. If EE commands are then disabled, the video disk software must be stopped and restarted so it will control the internal switcher automatically again.
Frames to Send EE On Early. (Default: 2) Enter the number of frames that the EE ON command should be sent early. This box is ignored unless the Send Disk EE Mode Commands box is enabled (checked).
Frames to Send EE Off Early. (Default: 3) Enter the number of frames that the EE OFF command should be sent early. This box is ignored unless the Send Disk EE Mode Commands box is enabled (checked).
14. Select Reporting tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Disk Specific Warnings. Displays diagnostic messages used for software development and debugging. If a specific problem or suspected bug is noticed, turn on this setting. If a disk diagnostic message appears when the problem occurs, the diagnostic code associated with the message should be reported to Automation Support. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Items Automatically Deleted or Recorded. This setting should only be used to verify or test that the disk is functioning properly. When enabled, diagnostic messages are only written to the error log at a client computer (if the client is configured to write error log files) when a spot is deleted, recorded or played from this disk port. Default is disabled (unchecked).
15. Select Disk Status tab.
The Disk Status tab is informational only. No user-configurable settings are available in this tab.
Click the Refresh tab to update the displayed information.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 70
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
IMPORTANT: For some video disks, such as the NEXIO, the total clips reported in Config Tool (Disk
Status) may be higher than what is reported in Air Client due to the inclusion of certain hidden or system files.
16. Select Diagnostics tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Diagnostics.
• Reinitialize: Click to reinitialize the device/port. Executing this action and confirming will stop any play out or recording in progress, clear the disk status lines, clear all spots in the
Device Storage Window, then initialize the disk port.
This should only be done if the disk is not recording or playing on air, and it is felt something is hung up in the software.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 71
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
This may need to be done if a videodisk communications program is brought down, then back up, and it does not signal the ADC controller that it was rebooted.
• ReVerify: Click to reverify all IDs from the video disk. This action removes all IDs from the
Device Storage Window that are not in any list look ahead, (no ‘*’ in the USED column) then reads all IDs from the video disk and puts them into the Device Storage Window.
This should only be used if you suspect the Device Storage Window does not have the correct IDs in it (they should only be what is in the disk or to be recorded or transferred in to the disk).
Before doing this note the ID count and any suspected IDs or lack of IDs, and note if after the ID List is re-read if the IDs in the Device Storage Window are different.
Using this function reduces the efficiency of the Auto Delete (Device Parameter Delete
When Full). It will still delete as needed, but the history of what spots were most recently used will be lost.
Reverify affects the most recently used information in the following way:
The ID list sort mode is always set to FIFO. If the disk follows VDCP protocol, when selecting to Re-verify IDs against the disk storage, the video disk gives the IDs following the rule that, oldest items are listed first, newest items are listed last. This maintains the usage frequency sequence.
If the video disk doesn’t follow VDCP, the usage frequency sequence will be lost.
• Make Input Port: Specify the port as a port for recording material. This should never be needed as the software automatically changes the port type for record or play out as needed. This option allows you to manually force the port to be an input port, overriding the default configuration.
• Make Output Port: Specify the port as a port for playing out material. This should never be needed as the software automatically changes the port type for record or play out as needed. This option allows you to manually force the port to be an output port, overriding the default configuration.
Port Status.
• Off Line / On Line: Manually take the port offline and online. Click the appropriate tab (Off
Line or On Line).
Trace Status: Allows tracing of the VDCP communications. This gives more intelligent filtering of the data logged in order to limit the amount data produced in the log.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 72
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
17. Select the Sony Disk tab. (For STS 10.)
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Specify the following parameters as required:
Play.
• Play latency in frames: Enter the number of frames that the play should be send early.
(Default: 0) Play command latency from CUED state in frames. In ADC this value is configured on the Prerolls/Postrolls tab with Parameter: Frames To Send Play early.
Record.
• Record latency in frames: (Default: 0) Record command latency from CUED state in frames.
In ADC this value is configured on the Prerolls/Postrolls tab with Parameter: Frames To Send
Record early.
• Record Confidence Stream: <<IMPORTANT: This parameter is currently unused. It exists only for historical reasons. In future builds this parameter will be removed from driver’s configuration.>>
Free Space. Space remaining in the server. Duration/size of the largest spot on the server.
• Space Remaining: Shows available free space on the server.
• Largest Spot: Shows available free space on the server.
• Refresh: Click to refresh the free space display.
18. Select the Stream Set tab. (For MAV70). A Stream on the Device Driver represents a media input or output on the physical device. It is possible to have two or more instances of a driver in a single
Device Server. The only limitation – all instances should control different ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 73
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Use this tab to set up channel count and type of each channel.
Specify the following parameters as required:
Stream 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: For each Stream 1-5, select the stream and then on the Stream configuration dialog specify…
• Serial Port: Enter the serial port which controls this video port. Use the dropdown menu to select the port (No Port, 1, 2, 3…64).
• Stream Type: The encoder or decoder type of a video port. Use the dropdown menu to select the Stream type. Options are: Encoder, CoDec, Decoder.
• When finished click Apply, and then click OK.
19. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
20. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
DTP Insertion Driver
The driver talks to DTP using RCS (Remote Control System) protocol via TCP/IP. So, there should be
TCP/IP connection between ADC100 and DTP. By default, it uses port number 49227. There is also java based GUI, jRCS (see image below), that it comes with DTP. Any java capable client PC can get the codes just by connecting to DTP. Please refer to DTP’s manual for the detail.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 74
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• The DTP Insertion driver is intended to control Cueing and Splicing of clips and input programs with the DTP through the use of Primary or Secondary AV (SAV) events within the Transmission List. The device itself should be configured first as desired by using jRCS, then the driver can be configured in
ADC100 based on the DTP’s configuration.
• The DTP-20 driver is used primarily to control Logos and text, and text crawls within the DTP stream by using secondary A/V events for cueing and playing. The DTP Insertion driver uses Primary or
Secondary AV (SAV) events and users can check the Device Storage window upon the Client applications to view the DTP clip storage.
• Working in Conjunction: The DTP Insertion Driver can work in conjunction with ADC’s legacy DTP-20
Driver. These drivers can be assigned to the same ADC Playlist for dual control of the DTP (i.e. Both drivers can be assigned separately to the same ADC Playlist for playout of Clips, Input Programs,
Graphics, and graphic effects.) In addition, when configuring the Communications parameters on each of our DTP drivers, they can both share the same cable, network IP address, and Port #.
Driver Use Note: If intending to utilize features on both DTP drivers, contact Sales and Support to determine how both drivers can be enabled in your Device Server Build.
Summary of function lists
• Cueing and Splicing of clips and input programs to a configured DTP output program
• Viewing of DTP clips and, if configured, input programs at Air Client or Media Client storage window
• Assigning output programs to driver streams.
The Driver stream handles one DTP output program.
Programs assignment is configurable at the driver configuration form
• Supported events
Primary or Secondary AV (sAV) events are supported
Supported Primary event types are A, AO (hard start) and U (up-count event) in combinations
AU and AOU.
• When the DTP Insertion driver is assigned to the same list as the video file server that plays the stream over which the insertions will occur, there is a potential for registration conflicts. To manage this issue the DTP Insertion Driver configuration supports playout qualifiers.
To configure the DTP Insertion Driver
Use the following procedure to configure this driver.
1. Under Video Disk Servers (VDCP) in the Available pane (right pane), select the DTP Insertion device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To
Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To configure Sync Skip after a GPI (input)" on page 52).
2. Select the DTP Insertion device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select
Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. The Client ID parameter must be unique in different instances of DTP insertion driver (or instances of older DTP drivers, such as "DTP-20" used to control logos and text crawls). The value is used as a cookie in commands to and from DTP to let drivers determine which instance should process DTP reply.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 75
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
By default the driver sends Splice command to DTP server before program "Splice Pre-roll" time which is configured at jRCS client. If it is necessary to send Splice command some time prior to
"Splice Pre-roll time", then use the "Frames to Send Splice Early" parameter. It is zero by default.
4. Select the Socket tab. The DTP IP address and the port number are required. The default port for
RCS port is 49227.
If log setting is enabled, all the communication logs are captured in a log file in ".\Log\DtpInsertion" directory. Please use logging only if you have problems with using driver and remember, since there is no log file management using logging may result in eating up local hard disk space.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 76
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: The following graphic is for reference only. The information on your tab screen will show the discrete IP Address of the DTP Server, which is its own Linux box, not local to the Device Controller
(Device Server).
5. Select the Streams tab. This tab allows the mapping any of active DTP output program to any available stream using drag and drop. The mechanism is similar to assigning driver streams to lists.
During configuration of multiple instances of this driver which will communicate with a single DTP, output programs must not be assigned to more than one stream in different instances.
Note: If any assigned to stream program was deleted or become not active after the driver reinitializes, the stream heads must have "OFFLINE" status at Device status window.
Note: Only Active output program references are displayed at Available list.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 77
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. Select the Prerolls tab. Use this tab to configure instant preroll and postroll values for the DTP insertion driver. Instant preroll and postroll values are applied to all driver heads.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Instant Prerolls.
The Instant feature is designed for coming out of a live or upcounting event as fast as possible when the next event has a near instant preroll. If you are using a master control switcher, the preroll must not be shorter than the shortest preroll supported by the switcher.
• Use Instant Prerolls. This function has a default of zero seconds, four frames. The values can range from four frames to 59 seconds. Instant Preroll provides instant play/skip capability to the device. When enabled, Instant Play Preroll is activated by pressing the Instant button or
Roll Now button on the control panel.
The preroll must be set to at least the minimum switcher preroll or the disk port may start playing before the switcher switches.
The preroll also must be set to at least four frames greater than the Disk Preroll and Number of Frames to Send Play Early. Four frames is the minimum preroll allowed by ADC. If not configured properly, the list may stop, or Roll Now may not work as expected, but take a longer time than desired.
If Instant Preroll is set longer than the List Preroll, instant play is actually a delayed play. ADC operations rely on list preroll settings configured through the Options menu, in Configure
Lists.
Device Postroll.
• Use Postroll. Default: Disabled, zero seconds, four frames. Range: four frames to 59 seconds. When enabled, this settings overrides other configured postroll settings. Device postroll, if enabled, must be set to at least 4 frames.
This feature allows the list to use one postroll for VTRs, cart machines, and other devices, and a different postroll for video disks. The Device Postroll can be longer or shorter than the list postroll. Its main purpose is to clear out the disk status line quickly after the disk stops
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 78
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager playing, so the status line can be loaded with the next event to cue. This allows small spots to be played back to back.
If the Device Postroll was set to a larger value, and the disk had over recorded the ID compared to the play duration, the disk would continue to play for the post roll duration if on air play switched to another device. This would permit mix effects during the post roll of the disk device into the play out from another device.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
Note: The Seconds and Frames values have no effect unless the Use Postroll box is enabled
(checked).
7. Select the AutoReturn tab. This tab is used to set – by stream - the input program which will be spliced after clip insertion.
Requirements: The following requirements must be met for this feature to work:
• "Auto Ripple Times" option at "Options" tab of the list properties window must be enabled for correct operation of the Auto-Return feature. The option must be enabled for all lists which will run DTP Insertion events with enabled Auto-Return.
• An Input reference, which will be set as default Source (Auto-Return program), must be active.
• About points A and C from MRD ({Clip Playing} / {Clip Cued} -> {Clip Cued} / {Idle} and .{Clip
Playing} / {Source Cued} -> {Source Cued} / {Idle}). The recommended minimal interval between the end of the first event (not postroll) and preroll of the second one is 3 seconds.
Splice to the second event can fail If the interval is lesser then 3 seconds. The back to back splice is not affected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Stream 1 – 8:
• Check "Enabled" to enable a stream.
• Input Program name: Each driver stream has a combo box populated with available ACTIVE input names. An error message is displayed if an incorrect input name is entered. It is
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 79
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager recommended not to type it, but instead choose the input from the combobox to avoid an incorrect input.
Note: Auto-Return settings are saved into ADC100NT.ini file with key
"DTP_StreamARProgram%d", where %d is the zero based stream number.
8. Select the Qualifiers tab. When the DTP Insertion driver is assigned to the same list as the video file server that plays the stream over which the insertions will occur, there is a potential for registration conflicts. To avoid this issue use this tab to add playout qualifiers to the DTP Insertion Driver configuration.
Note: This functionality is supported by ADC v12.19 and higher.
Configure the following parameters as required. Any combination of qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled.
Playing Event Qualifiers.
Event qualifier means playlist events must satisfy the selected qualifier before being allowed to play out through this VDCP port. If they do not pass the qualifier check, the event is not registered to this port, and is not allowed to play.
• Primary Event: Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows primary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Secondary to this VDCP disk port, and register Primary events to other devices, such as VTR.
• Secondary event (without Data Event): Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows secondary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Primary to this VDCP disk port, and register Secondary events to other devices, such as VTR.
Duration Range.
If a duration qualifier is enabled then the disk port will not play any ID whose duration is greater
(or less) than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 80
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• No Events Greater Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
• No Events Less Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
ID Range.
This qualifier is useful where some IDs are to be played and others not, and the Duration qualifier cannot distinguish between them.
• Qualify Events by ID: Check to enable qualification.
• Only Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field. If this qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only play IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be played, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To play only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• No Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field. If this qualifier is enabled, then the disk will ignore IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
For example: To ignore and not play IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• from -- to --: Alphanumeric entry. Specify range. Up to 32 characters can be entered into each field.
’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
9. Select the Diagnostics tab. Users can hit the "Reinitialize" button when needed. The driver will close
TCP connection, reset it state machine, and reread programs and clips collections.
Important Note: Pressing the "Reinitialize" button stops all splicings on all DTP Streams that are currently in progress. If it is necessary to update programs and clips collection without stopping splicing, use the "ReVerify" button.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 81
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
10. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
11. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Closing Device configuration prompts to save the configuration. The configuration information is saved to the ADC ini file (e.g. "ADC100NT.INI").
Video Disk Configuration (API/IP Driver)
The following is an example video disk configuration (NEXIO IP, GVG K2 IP, Omneon Spectrum IP). Your device may have slightly different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. For configuration details refer to the User Notes for your device.
IMPORTANT Note: Due to significant differences in configuration dialogs, the VDCP Video Disk
Configuration drivers are addressed under their own section. For details seeVideo Disk Configuration
Additional Port of Same Disk (w/ Air Protect)
The following procedure outlines setting up Additional Port of Same Disk functionality on an IP driver.
1. Configure two pairs of IP drivers: two from one disk and two from another.
2. Configure the first pair using ‘Additional Port of Same Disk’.
On the Config screen select Global > Port
• Additional Port Of Same Disk: Use this parameter to enable alternating playout of two streams on the same disk for the same list. Select the additional stream from the drop down list.
IMPORTANT: Additional port of same video disk works only if you are using it with two separate IP Multi Stream drivers.
3. Configure the second pair (taken as protected) using Additional Port of Same Disk.
4. If the first pair is configured with additional port reference, then configure the second pair in the same way.
5. Assign first pair to list as Air and second pair as Protect to Air disks accordingly.
6. In Air Client add several events to the list and Cue it.
Events are registered in rotation in both Device and Protect columns.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 82
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To Configure a NEXIO Video Disk (API/IP Driver)
ADC supports up to 8 ports per NEXIO native driver and can support numerous NEXIO Native drivers.
Each port used by the customer counts against their total number of individual ports purchased.
Driver Limitations
• Cloning: This ADC feature is currently not supported with the NEXIO Native Driver, as this feature does not support IP devices.
• Future releases will support hybrid "Serial & IP control" (Note: Serial Control requires VDCP
Extended ID driver. IP control is offered with ADC NEXIO/VR driver).
• AFD: ADC currently does not support overwriting current NEXIO Active Format Description parameters. Support for AFD is targeted for future ADC releases.
• SD/HD Filtering feature does not apply to Record ports/streams
• If the New AFD of a CUED event is changed to an unsupported value: the event will remain blue and will not turn red, the new unsupported value will not be applied, and clip will be played with its original New AFD.
IMPORTANT - Required Configuration changes: Configuration changes are required on the Device
Server and NEXIO server to maximize the performance of IP control. For details see the NEXIO IP User
Note.
Multi-Stream Driver Limitations
All new video servers can be controlled through TCP/IP connection. These drivers have more than one stream (Port) and therefore are very different from common drivers for video servers which required all streams to have the same parameters. Multi stream driver configurations allow each stream to be assigned its own parameters. However, ADC100/1000 limitations impact its use.
Example: The following example configuration is used to illustrate the impact of ADC100/1000 limitations. If two Ports of a NEXIO device are assigned to the same list and have the same type (for example, both ports are Player), two possible configurations can be established:
• Case 1: Use two copies of the driver (one driver for each port).
• Case 2: Use only one driver and select both Ports as Player.
Impact on Feature/Functions:
• Auto Copy:
Case 1: The "Auto Copy" function will only work if both Ports belong to the same Media list and use one port as Source and the other port as Preview/Review.
Case 2: The "Auto Copy" function will work only if the Source port number is less than the
Preview/Review Port number. If it is not, Auto Copy will not work.
Case 3: If the Preview/Review port is removed from the Media List, then Auto Copy will work.
• Air Protection:
Case 1: Air Protection will work.
Case 2: Air Protection will not work.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 83
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Recommendations:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• If different streams of the same device are used as the source and review devices at the same time, it is recommended to use the stream with the smaller number as the source and the stream with the larger number as the review.
• If, for some reason, it is necessary to use the stream with the smaller number as the source device, and the stream with the larger number as the review device, manually unassign the review device from the Media List with the help of the Config Tool right after the Prep Form is opened.
This second Recommendation may only be used when the "Review with Switching" feature is disabled.
About NEXIO ARC (Aspect Ratio Conversion) override
The NEXIO Native IP driver can control ARC (Aspect Ratio Conversion) override. It uses Secondary Events to trigger the ARC on the NEXIO Port.
Many stations use override control of the NEXIO Aspect Ratio Conversion (ARC). The NEXIO media file's
ARC is typically set at the point of ingest. NEXIO users can set a default Port ARC which can be used for their 24/7 playout. This default port ARC setting can be changed by a user or by Automation.
Automation Network Consideration
To take advantage of the Extended Device Storage Window view on the ADC Clients, the NEXIO and the
ADC Clients must be on the same LAN. If the NEXIO and ADC Clients are on separate LANs, then only the standard Device Storage Window view is available.
NEXIO high-speed Mediabase poll method
ADC v12.23 and higher supports NEXIO’s new API for getting - at full wire-speed - all IDs in Nexio
Mediabase with all metadata. This allows populating data in the hundreds of megabits rate instead of laboriously polling each ID for each metadata field and extended metadata (28 polls per ID in all).
To configure the NEXIO Driver (API/IP)
1. Under Video Disk Servers (API/IP) in the Available pane (right pane), select the NEXIO IP device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a
Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the NEXIO IP device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 84
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: The settings within the Global Section of the multi stream driver will have an effect upon all of the configured Streams. Unique settings may be stored per each Stream within the Stream configuration portion of the multi stream driver.
3. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select General. Available options may differ depending on the device selected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 85
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Device Name: Specify the name of the driver into the ADC1000NT configuration. Change this to the preferred name for the device, up to 16 characters. (Default: "NEXIO".) The device name identifies the disk port.
Note: When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options: Report Spot Shorter than Scheduled: Check to enable reporting. (This setting is not supported by the NEXIO Driver.)
Disable heart beat checking for device air protection: Enable/Disable heartbeat check.
Checked: The Driver will not check if the device lost heart beat.
Unchecked: The driver will sense the lost heart beat error and try to reset and reconnect with the device.
Recommendation: Uncheck unless the device can’t reply heart beat checking query command from driver.
4. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Communications. Use this tab to specify the TCP configuration.
Specify the following parameters as required:
IP: IP address of the controlled NEXIO/VR device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 86
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: The NEXIO server allows up to 16 (VR) TCP/IP connections (The driver will use up to 8 connections).
Port: IP port of the controlled NEXIO/VR device. TCP/IP communication is conducted on this port. (Range: 1:65000) (Default: 557)
Note: The NEXIO driver creates (configured channels + 1) separate links (socket connections) to server. There shouldn’t exist more than 56 connections to a single server. Other control application such as NXOS also creates several connections.
5. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Prerolls/Postrolls.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Prerolls.
• Frames To Send Play Early. The default should not need to be changed unless the disk has a fixed latency of greater than one frame for the play command. This setting determines when
(number of frames) the video disk port should receive the play command before playout is performed. A setting of zero sends the play command to the disk port the frame before the command is performed. (The default values shown in the screen shot above are recommended starting points. Your settings may differ.)
Typically, the setting should never be greater than four frames less than List Preroll or
Instant Preroll or the disk port will not play and the list will stop. If Disk Prerolls is used, the
Frames setting should be the same value unless a frame or two of switcher timing compensation is required.
• Frames To Send Record Early. The default should not need to be changed unless the disk has a fixed latency of greater than one frame for the play command. This setting determines when (number of frames) the video disk port should receive the record command before
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 87
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager recording is performed. A setting of zero sends the record command to the disk port the frame before the command is performed. (The default values shown in the screen shot above are recommended starting points. Your settings may differ.)
Typically, the setting should never be greater than four frames less than List Preroll or
Instant Preroll or the disk port will not play and the list will stop. If Disk Prerolls is used, the
Frames setting should be the same value unless a frame or two of switcher timing compensation is required.
6. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Storage.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Automatically Delete From Disk When Full. The automation system ensures that the specified amount of free disk space is maintained. Material is deleted from the disk automatically, based on a first-entered, last-played formula. Example:
A disk has 1000 spots on it, numbered 1 through 1000. Spot 23 is played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1001. Spot 65 is then played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1002. Each time a spot is played, it is incremented using this same sequence. As a result, spots that have been on the disk the longest without ever being played have the lowest numbers, and are deleted first. If material must be deleted on the disk, the lowest number would be deleted first, then the second lowest number, then the third lowest, etc. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Spots registered in the Lookahead are never automatically deleted.
Disk Space to Keep Free (Mins). The default is 10 minutes. The range is from 0 to 32,000 minutes. This parameter attempts to keep the disk with at least the entered number of minutes of disk space free. This prevents trying to record something larger than the available amount of
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 88
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager time, then having to delete the unfinished (truncated) item. For playout, the default value is typically used. Set this to the size of the largest ID you expect to record if Automatically Delete
From Disk When Full is enabled. This parameter should be used in time delay and record event applications. It is not recommended to set the value below four minutes (since all space available numbers are estimates due to variable rates of compression on different video images). This parameter has no effect unless Automatically Delete From Disk When Full is enabled.
Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted: Enable/Disable deletion of In-Use clips.
Checked: (Recommended) Users can’t delete an ID when it is inside the lookahead of a list from any clients.
Unchecked: Users can delete any event from the disk storage collection window of clients.
Note: When "Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted" is enabled and the "Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window" is also enabled in the "Storage Options" tab of the Air Client, attempting to delete in-use clips in the Device Storage Window results in a confirmation popup.
Clicking OK on the Confirm message will not result in these in-use clips being deleted. This applies to in-use clips that are not Protected and are not in a CUED state.
7. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Reporting.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Disk Specific Warnings. Displays diagnostic messages used for software development and debugging. If a specific problem or suspected bug is noticed, turn on this setting. If a disk diagnostic message appears when the problem occurs, the diagnostic code associated with the message should be reported to Automation Support. Default is disabled (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 89
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Items Automatically Deleted or Recorded. This setting should only be used to verify or test that the disk is functioning properly. When enabled, diagnostic messages are only written to the error log at a client computer (if the client is configured to write error log files) when a spot is deleted, recorded or played from this disk port. Default is disabled (unchecked).
8. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Ports.
Configure the following parameter as required:
Additional Port Of Same Disk: Use this parameter to enable alternating playout of two streams on the same disk for the same list. Select the additional stream from the drop down list.
IMPORTANT: Additional port of same video disk works only if you are using it with two separate
Nexio Multi Stream drivers.
Disk Port Comm. Timeout (frame): Specify the time-out period (in frames) which the driver uses to determine that the connection is lost. Default value of this option is 10 frames – that means that if there is no reply from the device (on any command) during this time, then the driver starts to reinitialize.
Note: Another application for this option is related to AirProtect functionality (all of these are also true for VDCP driver). Regardless the reason (device error, internal driver error, etc.) the driver reports that the transport command failed if the driver did not get PLAY (CUED) status after appropriate command during:
PLAY: Timeout value (frames)
CUE: Timeout value*3(frames)
9. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select a Stream 1 – Stream 6.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 90
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The selections for Stream 1- Stream 6 provide the same configuration criteria. Use these selections to set up channel count and type of each channel. In ADC channels are treated as streams.
A Stream on the Device Driver represents a media input or output on the physical device. It is possible to have two or more instances of a driver in a single Device Server. The only limitation – all instances should control different ports.
Specify the following parameters as required:
Port Type: Specify the type of ADC stream. Each NEXIO port appears in ADC as a stream with two heads (Stream one have heads number 1 and 2, stream two – 3 and 4, and so on. Stream X always controls physical NEXIO Server port X.)
Each stream may be configured as:
• Disabled
• Encoder (record only),
• Decoder (play only),
• Encoder/Decoder (both play and record)
Note: Currently, the configuration should match the device abilities. Setting a play-only stream as "Encoder" will not lead to an error, but record events will be skipped. If there is at least one
"Encoder" or "Encoder/Decoder" stream, then enable "Recording of Record Events" on the
"Recording" tab.
Currently ADC Media Client has the following limitation:
Even if some driver instances have configured ports 5 and 6 of a NEXIO Device, they will be shown as STRM1 and STRM2 in a Prep Form Configuration window. Nevertheless, the "List
Configurations" window contains the actual port names.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 91
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Reinitialize: If a NEXIO stream becomes non-responsive to Automation commands, then click this button to reinitialize a single NEXIO Stream. This does not impact other NEXIO streams when selected or pressed.
10. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select General.
Configure the following parameters as required:
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name (Default: NEXIO). When an event is threaded, the head number is added to the name.
The name is also used to identify the stream used to execute secondary data events. If a stream’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options.
• Stop Disk Play/Record on Init: A stop command is issued to the disk whenever the Device
Server is started or the port is re-initialized. When disabled, the Device Server connects to the video disk port if it can. If it cannot, the port must manually be re-initialized on the
Device Server (under System, Diagnostics). When disabled, it is the operator’s responsibility to check the port status in the Device Status Window and the IDs in the Device Storage
Window and re-initialize if required. Default is enabled (checked).
Note: Some sites prefer to DISABLE on ports the play to Air, and also Auto Record List ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 92
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
11. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select PreRolls/PostRolls.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Instant Prerolls.
The Instant feature is designed for coming out of a live or upcounting event as fast as possible when the next event has a near instant preroll. If you are using a master control switcher, the preroll must not be shorter than the shortest preroll supported by the switcher.
• Use Instant Prerolls. This function has a default of zero seconds, four frames. The values can range from four frames to 59 seconds. Instant Preroll provides instant play/skip capability to the device. When enabled, Instant Play Preroll is activated by pressing the Instant button or
Roll Now button on the control panel.
The preroll must be set to at least the minimum switcher preroll or the disk port may start playing before the switcher switches.
The preroll also must be set to at least four frames greater than the Disk Preroll and Number of Frames to Send Play Early. Four frames is the minimum preroll allowed by ADC. If not configured properly, the list may stop, or Roll Now may not work as expected, but take a longer time than desired.
If Instant Preroll is set longer than the List Preroll, instant play is actually a delayed play. ADC operations rely on list preroll settings configured through the Options menu, in Configure
Lists.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
Device Postroll.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 93
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Use Postroll. Default: Disabled, zero seconds, four frames. Range: four frames to 59 seconds. When enabled, this settings overrides other configured postroll settings. Device postroll, if enabled, must be set to at least 4 frames.
This feature allows the list to use one postroll for VTRs, cart machines, and other devices, and a different postroll for video disks. The Device Postroll can be longer or shorter than the list postroll. Its main purpose is to clear out the disk status line quickly after the disk stops playing, so the status line can be loaded with the next event to cue. This allows small spots to be played back to back.
If the Device Postroll was set to a larger value, and the disk had over recorded the ID compared to the play duration, the disk would continue to play for the post roll duration if on air play switched to another device. This would permit mix effects during the post roll of the disk device into the play out from another device.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
Note: The Seconds and Frames values have no effect unless the Use Postroll box is enabled
(checked).
Note: The settings for Frames To Send Play Early and Frames to Send Record Early are located within the Prerolls/Postrolls tab within the Global section.
12. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Storage.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Delete IDs After Play. Deletes a played event from the video disk. This is typically only enabled for testing or when recording for a one-time playout. Default is disabled (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 94
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For testing, this allows a short list of spots, repeated continuously, to record or cache. The spots are then continuously deleted. For actual on-air playout, the setting automatically deletes from a disk when it is full. This keeps the disk filled with the most current spots to reduce multiple recording or caching of a spot repeated more than once. This function only deletes a spot if it is completely played out, and was recorded by this port.
13. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Recording. This dialog is available only for an Encoder or Encoder/Decoder stream and is grayed out for a Decoder stream.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of record qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled. The recording qualifiers are effective on record events and caching, and Secondary Record Device Events. This is useful in caching to record only IDs that are commercials as they are short and not program material
(program material normally has a segment number). Default is disabled.
Allow Recording.
• Recording of Record Events. Allows recording of record events or other types of recordings.
When disabled, the disk port will not record. Recording with segment play enabled is equivalent to performing an insert edit or assemble record, depending on the SOM (if the video disk server supports this function).
• Record Only No Playout. When enabled, this port will not play any material. This was added to the software so a port can be assigned to a playlist for recording, with a separate port assigned for playout. Without enabling this parameter, if one port goes down, the other port will try to do both (record and playout). Since it cannot do both at the same time, the list will not work properly. Default is disabled.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 95
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Disable Recording With Segments. If enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Record Only Segments. Record only events with non-blank segment fields. If not enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it.
Prevent Recordings Greater Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a maximum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is greater than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Prevent Recordings Less Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a minimum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is less than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Only Record Events with ID in. Check to enable, then specify the event range ’--to--‘ limits.
When enabled, the disk will only record IDs whose first character is between or equal to the limits. Numeric and alphabetic entries (upper and lower case ) are permitted.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be recorded, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To record only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters. ’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
The ID qualifier is useful where some IDs are recorded and others not, and the Duration and
Segment qualifiers cannot distinguish between them. The traffic system can designate a certain range of IDs that will be cached or recorded only.
14. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Recording Parameters. Use this tab to set record parameters.
This step is optional.
Please note that setting up record parameters is allowed only for Encoder and Encoder/Decoder type ports. This dialog is available only for an Encoder or Encoder/Decoder stream and is grayed out for a Decoder stream.
Record Parameters is equivalent to NEXIO Native API Protocol Set Record Parameters (C8 C1) command.
About Recording Clips: To record a clip, streams/ports must be assigned and used in the appropriate order:
• Stream/Port 1 - rec
• Stream/Port 2 - review
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 96
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: A clip cannot be recorded if both streams/ports are assigned to one Media list, but the review device isn't assigned in Media Client.
Specify the following parameters as required:
Record Channel: Select a record channel to configure (Stream 1 – 6). A message is displayed indicting its current configuration status.
Record Parameters.
• Video format: From the dropdown list, select a supported video format encoding algorithm
(i.e. MPEG2, DV, etc.) used for recorded clips.
• Video N: The total size of Group of Pictures (GOP). Possible values are: 1 - 16.
• Video M: The distance between reference picture frames in Group of Pictures (GOP).
Possible values are: 1 – 3. Must be an equal divisor of Video N value.
• Bit Rate (Mbps): Manually enter the compressed bit rate in Mbps of the video portion of the clip being recorded. The highest value this parameter can be set to is 500 Mbps.
• Audio Channels: The number of Audio channels / tracks currently enabled. (Range: 1-6)
• VBI Present: Check if Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) data is present in the video.
• Aspect ratio: Select the aspect ratio being used for clips: 3:4, or 16:9.
About GOP:
GOP is an MPEG term meaning Group Of Pictures. It is a collection of consecutive frames of video. Usually between 0.5 and 1 second of video will be held in 1 GOP. Each picture within the
GOP can be 1 of 3 types: I, P, or B.
Note: A GOP always starts with an I picture.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 97
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Type
I (Intra)
Meaning
A complete picture that can be decoded without the need to decode any other pictures first. It is similar to a JPEG still image.
P (Predicted) P frames are predicted from the previous "reference" (I or P) frame. If the encoder can find correlation between the previous reference and the P frame, macroblocks in the P frame will be derived from the reference with a motion vector and DCT difference information. In the case where a good match cannot be found, the P frame will contain some intra coded macroblocks
B (Bidirectional) These are predicted from the previous and future reference frames. The encoder can use macroblock information each of these frames to produce the best match for each macroblock in the B frame. If no good matches can be found the macroblock will be intra coded.
About Supported Video Formats:
The NEXIOVR driver supports all video formats currently supported by NEXIO.
• Video Format List Rule Process: The following table outlines the rules for forming a list of currently available record formats:
NEXIO channel support:
JPEG
NEXIO channel support for recording
JPEG
MPEG2 4:2:0
MPEG2 4:2:2
MPEG2 4:2:0
MPEG2 4:2:2, IMX (MPEG 4:2:2)
DV, all types DVCAM (DV25), DVCPRO (DV25), DVCPRO
HD (DV50)
H.264, MPEG4 Part 10 (Long GOP, AVC) H.264 4:2:0, H.264 4:2:2
AVC-Intra, MPEG4 Part10 (I-Frame, AVC) H.264[4:2:0] CBG (AVC-Intra class 50)
H.264 [4:2:2] CBG (AVC-Intra class 100)
* Other record formats are always unavailable.
For example if NEXIO channel returned the following list of supported formats:
MPEG2 4:2:0, MPEG2 4:2:2, DV, all types, then the available record format list will contain:
MPEG2 4:2:0, MPEG2 4:2:2, IMX (MPEG 4:2:2), DVCAM (DV25), DVCPRO (DV25), DVCPRO
HD (DV50)
Note: The driver can’t automatically determine SD or HD channel mode, so some formats may be unavailable for recording even if they present in list of video format. For example if
NEXIO channel returned DV, all types then video format will contain DVCAM (DV25),
DVCPRO (DV25), DVCPRO HD (DV50), but if channel is in SD mode, then DVCPRO HD (DV50) actually is unavailable.
• Video Format on the Recording Parameters sheet:
The Configuration form can’t populate the record video format list until a port is initialized
(the port has to determine what formats are currently available and this is possible only when the port is enabled), so the ‘Recording Parameters’ sheet is enabled only when port
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 98
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager type is Encoder or Encoder/Decoder and initialization of a port is complete. The following is an example of all video formats listed.
15. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Qualifiers. Use this tab to set playing event qualifiers.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 99
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Configure the following parameters as required:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Any combination of qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled.
Playing Event Qualifiers: Event qualifier means playlist events must satisfy the selected qualifier before being allowed to play out through this VDCP port. If they do not pass the qualifier check, the event is not registered to this port, and is not allowed to play.
• Primary Event: Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows primary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Secondary to this VDCP disk port, and register Primary events to other devices, such as VTR.
• Secondary event (without Data Event): Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows secondary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Primary to this VDCP disk port, and register Secondary events to other devices, such as VTR.
Duration Range: If a duration qualifier is enabled then the disk port will not play any ID whose duration is greater (or less) than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
• No Events Greater Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
• No Events Less Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
ID Range: If the ID qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only play IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
This qualifier is useful where some IDs are to be played and others not, and the Duration qualifier cannot distinguish between them.
• Only Events with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be played, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To play only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• No Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field.
For example: To ignore and not play IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• from -- to --: Alphanumeric entry. Specify range for the two options. Up to 32 characters can be entered in each field.
’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 100
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
16. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Segments.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters). Up to two characters can be added to IDs. Useful for multi-segment recording, this option causes the ID on a video disk to be appended with either 1 or 2 characters to distinguish the segments.
If you never use more than 9 segments in any ID, select 1 character (which allows up to 9 segments). If you select 2 characters here, a maximum of 99 segments is allowed. Valid numbers are 0, 1, and 2. Default is 0.
Example: If Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters) were set to 2, a 3-segment ID titled "spot" would reside on the video disk as "spot01," "spot02," and "spot03." If the disk has a maximum of 32 characters allowed for an ID, the ID is truncated on the disk if the ID takes up 30 or more characters (2 characters are lost to allow for the 2 segment characters).
Segment Play Search path: Use this parameter to specify segmented program ID search through various settings of the Modify ID parameter. For media play out, the first valid setting is used.
The list permits each setting to be individually enabled or disabled, and for the order in which they are checked to be defined. Populating the search path with a single entry matching the fixed settings allows operation identical to current behavior.
Select a listed segment then use the associated buttons to arrange:
• Up / Down: Use these buttons to position the segment in the list.
• Enable: Use this buttons to enable a selected segment.
• Disable: Becomes active when Enable is selected. Use this button to disable a selected segment.
• Cue: Becomes active when Enable is selected.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 101
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Cue with Data: Becomes active when Cue is selected
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of segments with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT. o
Default setting is disabled.
• When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission List treats this event like any other missing event.
17. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Spots.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of single spots with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 102
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT. o
Default setting is disabled.
• When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission List treats this event like any other missing event.
18. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select E to E.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Send Disk EE Mode Commands. (Default: disabled) These commands are only supported on certain video disks. Do not enable unless you are sure they are supported in your version.
When enabled, Automaton will send EE commands to the NEXIO stream when it starts and stops playing.
This effectively makes the video disk a video player and insert switcher if the input to the port is a primary video feed, and the video disk is controlled by a ‘break away’ list. Once the video disk receives an EE command, it enters an EE controlled mode where it no longer controls the
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 103
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager internal switcher. If EE commands are then disabled, the video disk software must be stopped and restarted so it will control the internal switcher automatically again.
Frames to Send EE On Early. (Default: 2) Enter the number of frames that the EE ON command should be sent early. This box is ignored unless the Send Disk EE Mode Commands box is enabled (checked).
Frames to Send EE Off Early. (Default: 3) Enter the number of frames that the EE OFF command should be sent early. This box is ignored unless the Send Disk EE Mode Commands box is enabled (checked).
19. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Video ARC.
Configure the following parameters as required:
IMPORTANT: Only streams which satisfy the following conditions are enabled for configuration:
The selected Stream must have a "Decoder" or "Encoder/Decoder" port type to configure these parameters. If the NEXIO port is Record only, the "Output Aspect Ratio" displays as "Unknown".
The Stream should be online (i.e. connected to the NEXIO Server).
If stream does not match these conditions, it is shown as grayed out, its Output Aspect Ratio is shown as Unknown, and the Video ARC list shown as empty.
Output Aspect Ratio: This read-only parameter displays the aspect ratio for the output video stream. (e.g. 4:3, 16:9, Unknown).
Video ARC: Video clips can be played back in different Aspect Ratio Conversions (ARCs), resulting in different sized images on a display. From the dropdown list select the type of ARC to use. The options available depend on the Output Aspect Ratio:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 104
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Output Aspect Ratio
4:3
16:9
Unknown
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Video ARC options
Default, Letter Box, Center Cut, 14:9, 21:9
Default, Pillar Box, Middle Cut, 14:9, 21:9
Grayed out (no options displayed)
Note: Linear Video ARC is not available for configuration. Only Video ARC modes with
pre-defined size and crop parameters are supported.
About the Stream Initialization Process:
Information about Output Aspect Ratio and the Video ARC assigned to a NEXIO stream is obtained by the driver during the stream initialization process (this process can take several seconds). When the driver receives this information, it updates the stream Output Aspect Ratio field of the configuration dialog and available Video ARC modes are changed according to this Output Aspect
Ratio of the stream.
Saved Video ARC modes are applied after the driver has initialized the stream and received the stream Output Aspect Ratio.
CAUTION: If the Video ARC option in the configuration dialog is opened at the moment when driver has not yet receive information about stream configuration from the NEXIO Server, an Output
Aspect ratio of Unknown is displayed and the following Video ARC options are displayed: Default,
Letter Box, Pillar Box, Center Cut, Middle Cut. These parameters will be updated once the driver receives the stream information.
20. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 6 and then select Filters.
Configure the following parameters as appropriate:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 105
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
SD Playout: Enabled (check) this parameter for this stream to register the clips in SD format (SD clip is a clip with resolution less than 720).
HD Playout: Enabled (check) this parameter for this stream to register the clips in HD format
(HD clip is a clip with resolution 720p, 1080i, 1080p).
Play Unidentified Clips: Enabled (check) this parameter for this stream to register the clips for whom the concept of "SD / HD" does not apply. (Currently, only "AUDIO ONLY" type is supported.)
Note: By default each checkbox is enabled; this means that there is no filtering involved.
21. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Disk Status. The Disk Status tab is informational only. No user-configurable settings are available in this tab. Click the Refresh tab to update the displayed information.
Disk Status Parameters:
• Selected ports shows numbers of ports, which are configured via this driver by user.
• Returned ports displays numbers of ports, which have been really configured and correctly reply to commands.
• Port Initialized (or "Port Initializing") indicates whether initialization process has been finished.
• Ports Opened shows amount of ports, specified on page "K2ClientInfo".
• Disk Not Full (or "Disk Full") and Archive Not Full (or "Archive Full") show condition of disk and archive.
• Spots in Disk shows amount of clips in current working folder.
• Disk Free and Max Record display free space and free continuous space in timecode format.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 106
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Minutes Free In Disk shows free space in minutes.
• Minutes Signal Free shows critical amount of free minutes in disk, when the video disk is considered to be full (it is specified on page Storage in Global parameters).
Refresh: Press this button to obtain current information about the device.
22. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Diagnostics.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Diagnostics.
• Reinitialize: Click to reinitialize the device/port. Executing this Global action will impact
(stop) any in-progress play/record operations of all configured NEXIO streams. It will clear the disk status lines, clear all spots in the Device Storage Window, and then initialize the disk port.
IMPORTANT: If a specific NEXIO stream requires a Re-Init, then the user should click on the specific stream name in the Config Device Tool and press the Reinitialize button on that configuration tab.
This should only be done if the disk is not recording or playing on air, and it is felt something is hung up in the software.
A Reinit may be required if the videodisk communications program is brought down, then back up, and it does not signal the ADC controller that it was rebooted.
• ReVerify: Click to reverify all IDs from the video disk. This action removes all IDs from the
Device Storage Window that are not in any list look ahead, (no ‘*’ in the USED column) then reads all IDs from the video disk and puts them into the Device Storage Window.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 107
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
This should only be used if you suspect the Device Storage Window does not have the correct IDs in it (they should only be what is in the disk or to be recorded or transferred in to the disk).
Before doing this note the ID count and any suspected IDs or lack of IDs, and note if after the ID List is re-read if the IDs in the Device Storage Window are different.
Using this function reduces the efficiency of the Auto Delete (Device Parameter Delete
When Full). It will still delete as needed, but the history of what spots were most recently used will be lost.
• Verbose Diagnostic Logging: Enable (check) this option to include additional messages to the log and to save state in the .ini file (driver section, "DiagLogMode" key). This option improves readability of Nexio IP driver logging by redirecting console logging to Diagnostic logging in the Config Tool.
Trace Setting: Only Trace the Following IDs: Check to enable tracing of the communications for designated IDs. This gives more intelligent filtering of the data logged in order to limit the amount data produced in the log.
23. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
24. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
To Configure an Omneon Spectrum Video Disk (API/IP Driver)
This driver configuration:
Provides IP API support for Spectrum
Allows control of multiple ports by a single driver
Provides an option for Serial communications for real time control
Multi-Stream Driver Limitations
All new video servers can be controlled through TCP/IP connection. These drivers have more than one stream (Port) and therefore are very different from common drivers for video servers which required all streams to have the same parameters. Multi stream driver configurations allow each stream to be assigned its own parameters. However, ADC limitations impact its use.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 108
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Example: The following example configuration is used to illustrate the impact of ADC limitations. If two Ports of an Omenon device are assigned to the same list and have the same type (for example, both ports are Player), two possible configurations can b
• Case 1: Use two copies of the driver (one driver for each port).
• Case 2: Use only one driver and select both Ports as Player.
Impact on Feature/Functions:
• Auto Copy:
Case 1: The "Auto Copy" function will only work if both Ports belong to the same Media list and use one port as Source and the other port as Preview/Review.
Case 2: The "Auto Copy" function will work only if the Source port number is less than the
Preview/Review Port number. If it is not, Auto Copy will not work.
Case 2: If the Preview/Review port is removed from the Media List, then Auto Copy will work.
• Air Protection:
Case 1: Air Protection will work.
Case 2: Air Protection will not work.
Recommendations:
• If different streams of the same device are used as the source and review devices at the same time, it is recommended to use the stream with the smaller number as the source and the stream with the larger number as the review.
• If, for some reason, it is necessary to use the stream with the smaller number as the source device, and the stream with the larger number as the review device, the review device should be manually unassigned form the Media List with the help of the Config Tool right after the Prep Form is opened.
This second Recommendation may only be used when the "Review with Switching" feature is disabled.
To configure the Omneon Driver (API/IP)
1. Under Video Disk Servers (API/IP) in the Available pane (right pane), select the Omneon Spectrum
IP device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see:
To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46). Once a device
has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Omneon Spectrum IP Video Disk device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 109
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: The settings within the Global Section of the multi stream driver will have an effect upon all of the configured Streams. Unique settings may be stored per each Stream within the Stream configuration portion of the multi stream driver.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 110
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
3. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select General. Available options may differ depending on the device selected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Specify the name of the driver into the ADC1000NT configuration. Change this to the preferred name for the device, up to 16 characters. (Default: "Spect".) The device name identifies the disk port.
Note: When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options:
• Report Spot Shorter than Scheduled: Check to enable reporting.
• Reset Storage on ReInit: Check to reset the storage when the device is reinitialized. o
Checked: Destroy the old storage collection and recollect storage from disk whenever the disk driver reconnects with the video disk from a lost communication. o
Unchecked: Continue to use the old storage collection after the reconnection.
Recommendation: Uncheck if the disk frequently looses communication.
In Operation:
• If "Reset Storage on Init" is Enabled and communication is lost, the storage collection is repopulated.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 111
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• If "Reset Storage on Init" is Disabled and communication is lost, no action is performed upon the storage collection.
Disable heart beat checking for device air protection: Enable/Disable heartbeat check.
Checked: The Driver will not check if the device lost heart beat.
Unchecked: The driver will sense the lost heart beat error and try to reset and reconnect with the device.
Recommendation: Uncheck unless the device can’t reply heart beat checking query command from driver.
4. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Communications. Use this tab to specify the TCP configuration.
Specify the following parameters as required:
IP: IP address of the controlled Omneon Spect VR device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 112
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
5. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Omneon Disk.
Specify the following parameters as required:
Play
• Play latency in frames: Enter the number of frames that the play should be send early.
(Default: 0) Play command latency from CUED state in frames. In ADC this value is configured on the Prerolls/Postrolls tab with Parameter: Frames To Send Play early.
Record
• Record latency in frames: (Default: 0) Record command latency from CUED state in frames.
In ADC this value is configured on the Prerolls/Postrolls tab with Parameter: Frames To Send
Record early.
• Record extra frames: Specify the number of extra frames to record.
• Record confidence stream: <<IMPORTANT: This parameter is currently unused. It exists only for historical reasons. In future builds this parameter will be removed from driver’s configuration.>>
Free Space
• Space Remaining: Shows available free space on the server
• Largest Spot: Shows available free space on the server
• ID: Click to refresh the free space display
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 113
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Prerolls/Postrolls.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Prerolls.
• Frames To Send Play Early. The default is -4. (Recommended range is -4 to -6) Adjust the parameter to best accommodate the latency for the specific facility. This setting determines when (number of frames) the video disk port should receive the play command before playout is performed. A setting of zero sends the play command to the disk port the frame before the command is performed.
The setting should never be greater than four frames less than List Preroll or Instant Preroll or the disk port will not play and the list will stop. If Disk Prerolls is used, the Frames setting should be the same value unless a frame or two of switcher timing compensation is required.
• Frames To Send Record Early. The default is 0 and should not need to be changed unless the disk has a fixed latency of greater than one frame for the play command. This setting determines when (number of frames) the video disk port should receive the record command before recording is performed. A setting of zero sends the record command to the disk port the frame before the command is performed.
The setting should never be greater than four frames less than List Preroll or Instant Preroll or the disk port will not play and the list will stop. If Disk Prerolls is used, the Frames setting should be the same value unless a frame or two of switcher timing compensation is required.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 114
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
7. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Storage.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Automatically Delete From Disk When Full. The automation system ensures that the specified amount of free disk space is maintained. Material is deleted from the disk automatically, based on a first-entered, last-played formula. Example:
A disk has 1000 spots on it, numbered 1 through 1000. Spot 23 is played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1001. Spot 65 is then played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1002. Each time a spot is played, it is incremented using this same sequence. As a result, spots that have been on the disk the longest without ever being played have the lowest numbers, and are deleted first. If material must be deleted on the disk, the lowest number would be deleted first, then the second lowest number, then the third lowest, etc. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Spots registered in the Lookahead are never automatically deleted.
Disk Space to Keep Free (Mins). The default is 10 minutes. The range is from 0 to 32,000 minutes. This parameter attempts to keep the disk with at least the entered number of minutes of disk space free. This prevents trying to record something larger than the available amount of time, then having to delete the unfinished (truncated) item. For playout, the default value is typically used. Set this to the size of the largest ID you expect to record if Automatically Delete
From Disk When Full is enabled. This parameter should be used in time delay and record event applications. It is not recommended to set the value below four minutes (since all space available numbers are estimates due to variable rates of compression on different video images). This parameter has no effect unless Automatically Delete From Disk When Full is enabled.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 115
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted: Enable/Disable deletion of In-Use clips.
Checked: (Recommended) Users can’t delete an ID when it is inside the lookahead of a list from any clients.
Unchecked: Users can delete any event from the disk storage collection window of clients.
Note: When "Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted" is enabled and the "Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window" is also enabled in the "Storage Options" tab of the Air Client, attempting to delete in-use clips in the Device Storage Window results in a confirmation popup.
Clicking OK on the Confirm message will not result in these in-use clips being deleted. This applies to in-use clips that are not Protected and are not in a CUED state.
List of Extensions: The field format is a sequence of extensions without any space characters.
Each extension must start with a dot. Extensions are case sensitive. The default list of extensions will be used if the field is empty.
Clip Directory: Specify the directory for clips.
8. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Reporting.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Disk Specific Warnings. Displays diagnostic messages used for software development and debugging. If a specific problem or suspected bug is noticed, turn on this setting. If a disk diagnostic message appears when the problem occurs, the diagnostic code associated with the message should be reported to Automation Support. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Items Automatically Deleted or Recorded. This setting should only be used to verify or test that the disk is functioning properly. When enabled, diagnostic messages are only written to the error log at a client computer (if the client is configured to write error log files) when a spot is deleted, recorded or played from this disk port. Default is disabled (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 116
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
9. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Ports.
Configure the following parameter as required:
Additional Port Of Same Disk: Use this parameter to enable alternating playout of two streams on the same disk for the same list. Select the additional stream from the drop down list.
10. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select a Stream 1 – Stream 5.
The selections for Stream 1- Stream 5 provide the same configuration criteria. Use these selections to set up channel count and type of each channel. In ADC channels are treated as streams.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 117
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
A Stream on the Device Driver represents a media input or output on the physical device. It is possible to have two or more instances of a driver in a single Device Server. The only limitation – all instances should control different ports.
Specify the following parameters as required:
Specify the type of ADC stream. Each stream may be configured as:
Note: The configuration should match the device abilities.
• Disabled
• List of available ports from Omneon. As shown in the following example, when a port is selected the port designation appears alongside the specified stream:
Example Available Ports:
The following are examples of available ports. As shown ports can have different names depending on Omneon.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 118
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
These names are configured at Omneon devices (not from the Config Tool). The following image is of the Media Director for the Omneon.
Reinitialize: If an Omneon stream becomes non-responsive to Automation commands, then click this button to reinitialize a single Omneon Stream. This does not impact other Omneon streams when selected or pressed.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 119
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
11. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select General.
Configure the following parameters as required:
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name (Default: Spect). When an event is threaded, the head number is added to the name.
The name is also used to identify the stream used to execute secondary data events. If a stream’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options.
• Stop Disk Play/Record on Init: A stop command is issued to the disk whenever the Device
Server is started or the port is re-initialized. When disabled, the Device Server connects to the video disk port if it can. If it cannot, the port must manually be re-initialized on the
Device Server (under System, Diagnostics). When disabled, it is the operator’s responsibility to check the port status in the Device Status Window and the IDs in the Device Storage
Window and re-initialize if required. Default is enabled (checked).
Note: Some sites prefer to DISABLE on ports the play to Air, and also Auto Record List ports.
• Back To Back Play: When performing back to back play of short spots (for example, five second spots), keep the preroll and postroll of the lists as short as possible. The postroll time must be compatible with the VTR, switcher and effect minimum postroll times. Also, the
ADC Device Server allows a video disk that has started cueing to continue cueing during preroll as long as cueing finishes before playout time. If disabled, the second head status
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 120
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager line never threads (staying offline). This option should typically be left enabled. Default is enabled (checked).
12. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select PreRolls/PostRolls.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Instant Prerolls.
The Instant feature is designed for coming out of a live or upcounting event as fast as possible when the next event has a near instant preroll. If you are using a master control switcher, the preroll must not be shorter than the shortest preroll supported by the switcher.
• Use Instant Prerolls. This function has a default of zero seconds, four frames. The values can range from four frames to 59 seconds. Instant Preroll provides instant play/skip capability to the device. When enabled, Instant Play Preroll is activated by pressing the Instant button or
Roll Now button on the control panel.
The preroll must be set to at least the minimum switcher preroll or the disk port may start playing before the switcher switches.
The preroll also must be set to at least four frames greater than the Disk Preroll and Number of Frames to Send Play Early. Four frames is the minimum preroll allowed by ADC. If not configured properly, the list may stop, or Roll Now may not work as expected, but take a longer time than desired.
If Instant Preroll is set longer than the List Preroll, instant play is actually a delayed play. ADC operations rely on list preroll settings configured through the Options menu, in Configure
Lists.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 121
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Device Postroll.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Use Postroll. Default: Disabled, zero seconds, four frames. Range: four frames to 59 seconds. When enabled, this settings overrides other configured postroll settings. Device postroll, if enabled, must be set to at least 4 frames.
This feature allows the list to use one postroll for VTRs, cart machines, and other devices, and a different postroll for video disks. The Device Postroll can be longer or shorter than the list postroll. Its main purpose is to clear out the disk status line quickly after the disk stops playing, so the status line can be loaded with the next event to cue. This allows small spots to be played back to back.
If the Device Postroll was set to a larger value, and the disk had over recorded the ID compared to the play duration, the disk would continue to play for the post roll duration if on air play switched to another device. This would permit mix effects during the post roll of the disk device into the play out from another device.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
Note: The Seconds and Frames values have no effect unless the Use Postroll box is enabled
(checked).
Note: The settings for Frames To Send Play Early and Frames to Send Record Early are located within the Prerolls/Postrolls tab within the Global section.
13. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select Storage.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Delete IDs After Play. Deletes a played event from the video disk. This is typically only enabled for testing or when recording for a one-time playout. Default is disabled (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 122
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For testing, this allows a short list of spots, repeated continuously, to record or cache. The spots are then continuously deleted. For actual on-air playout, the setting automatically deletes from a disk when it is full. This keeps the disk filled with the most current spots to reduce multiple recording or caching of a spot repeated more than once. This function only deletes a spot if it is completely played out, and was recorded by this port.
14. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select Recording.
About Recording Clips: To record a clip, streams/ports must be assigned and used in the appropriate order:
Stream/Port 1 - rec
Stream/Port 2 - review
Note: A clip cannot be recorded if both streams/ports are assigned to one Media list, but the review device isn't assigned in Media Client.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of record qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled. The recording qualifiers are effective on record events and caching, and Secondary Record Device Events. This is useful in caching to record only IDs that are commercials as they are short and not program material
(program material normally has a segment number). Default is disabled.
Allow Recording.
• Recording of Record Events. Allows recording of record events or other types of recordings.
When disabled, the disk port will not record. Recording with segment play enabled is equivalent to performing an insert edit or assemble record, depending on the SOM (if the video disk server supports this function).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 123
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Back to Back Recording. For secondary record events, this parameter must be disabled.
Only enable this option if your video disk server supports this function.
This setting is useful when setting up a disk to perform continuous time delay applications.
To set this up, enable this parameter and then place a sequence of continuous IDs on a record list. The video disk records every frame into the proper ID. The record list can be made into a playlist and played out. The play output is exactly the same as what was recorded.
This function affects the play out and recording list function and the disk driver function; no other function is affected. When enabled, it: o
Allows the recording port to support back to back recording between different recording
IDs. o
The leading Switch Only Device will allow the back to back play between the different play IDs. o
The back to back recording function records single-file-multi-segment file to single file in video disk and the Air Client updates the database after each segment has finished the record. o
The recording operation to video disk will not stop until the recording of all segments is finished.
Note: Refer to the documentation on your disk to verify if your disk supports back-to-back recording.
• Record Only No Playout. When enabled, this port will not play any material. This was added to the software so a port can be assigned to a playlist for recording, with a separate port assigned for playout. Without enabling this parameter, if one port goes down, the other port will try to do both (record and playout). Since it cannot do both at the same time, the list will not work properly. Default is disabled.
Disable Recording With Segments. If enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Record Only Segments. Record only events with non-blank segment fields. If not enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it.
Prevent Recordings Greater Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a maximum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is greater than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Prevent Recordings Less Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a minimum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is less than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Only Record Events with ID in. Check to enable, then specify the event range ’--to--‘ limits.
When enabled, the disk will only record IDs whose first character is between or equal to the limits. Numeric and alphabetic entries (upper and lower case ) are permitted.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be recorded, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To record only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters. ’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
The ID qualifier is useful where some IDs are recorded and others not, and the Duration and
Segment qualifiers cannot distinguish between them. The traffic system can designate a certain range of IDs that will be cached or recorded only.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 124
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
15. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select Qualifiers. Use this tab to set playing event qualifiers.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled.
Playing Event Qualifiers: Event qualifier means playlist events must satisfy the selected qualifier before being allowed to play out through this VDCP port. If they do not pass the qualifier check, the event is not registered to this port, and is not allowed to play.
• Primary Event: Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows primary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Secondary to this VDCP disk port, and register Primary events to other devices, such as VTR.
• Secondary event (without Data Event): Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows secondary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Primary to this VDCP disk port, and register Secondary events to other devices, such as VTR.
Duration Range: If a duration qualifier is enabled then the disk port will not play any ID whose duration is greater (or less) than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
• No Events Greater Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
• No Events Less Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 125
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
ID Range: If the ID qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only play IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
This qualifier is useful where some IDs are to be played and others not, and the Duration qualifier cannot distinguish between them.
• Only Events with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be played, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To play only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• No Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field.
For example: To ignore and not play IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• from -- to --: Alphanumeric entry. Specify range for the two options. Up to 32 characters can be entered in each field.
’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
16. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select Segments.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters). Up to two characters can be added to IDs. Useful for multi-segment recording, this option causes the ID on a video disk to be appended with either 1 or 2 characters to distinguish the segments.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 126
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If you never use more than 9 segments in any ID, select 1 character (which allows up to 9 segments). If you select 2 characters here, a maximum of 99 segments is allowed. Valid numbers are 0, 1, and 2. Default is 0.
Example: If Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters) were set to 2, a 3-segment ID titled "spot" would reside on the video disk as "spot01," "spot02," and "spot03." If the disk has a maximum of 32 characters allowed for an ID, the ID is truncated on the disk if the ID takes up 30 or more characters (2 characters are lost to allow for the 2 segment characters).
Segment Play Search path: Use this parameter to specify segmented program ID search through various settings of the Modify ID parameter. For media play out, the first valid setting is used.
The list permits each setting to be individually enabled or disabled, and for the order in which they are checked to be defined. Populating the search path with a single entry matching the fixed settings allows operation identical to current behavior.
Select a listed segment then use the associated buttons to arrange:
• Up / Down: Use these buttons to position the segment in the list.
• Enable: Use this buttons to enable a selected segment.
• Disable: Becomes active when Enable is selected. Use this button to disable a selected segment.
• Cue: Becomes active when Enable is selected.
• Cue with Data: Becomes active when Cue is selected
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of segments with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT. o
Default setting is disabled.
• When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission List treats this event like any other missing event.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 127
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
17. In the navigation pane expand a Stream 1 – Stream 5 and then select Spots.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of single spots with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT.
• Default setting is disabled.When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission
List treats this event like any other missing event.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 128
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
18. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Disk Status. The Disk Status tab is informational only. No user-configurable settings are available in this tab. Click the Refresh tab to update the displayed information.
Disk Status Parameters:
• Output Port Selected shows numbers of ports, which are configured via this driver by user.
• Output Port Returned displays numbers of ports, which have been really configured and correctly reply to commands.
• Port Initialized (or "Port Initializing") indicates whether initialization process has been finished.
• Ports Opened shows amount of ports, specified on page "K2ClientInfo".
• Disk Not Full (or "Disk Full") and Archive Not Full (or "Archive Full") show condition of disk and archive.
• Spots in Disk shows amount of clips in current working folder.
• Disk Free and Max Record display free space and free continuous space in timecode format.
• Minutes Free In Disk shows free space in minutes.
• Minutes Signal Free shows critical amount of free minutes in disk, when the video disk is considered to be full (it is specified on page Storage in Global parameters).
• Offline Archive Not Full indicates status of the archive.
Refresh: Press this button to obtain current information about the device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 129
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
19. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Diagnostics.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Reinitialize: Click to reinitialize the device/port. Executing this action and confirming will stop any play out or recording in progress, clear the disk status lines, clear all spots in the Device
Storage Window, then initialize the disk port.
This should only be done if the disk is not recording or playing on air, and it is felt something is hung up in the software.
This may need to be done if a videodisk communications program is brought down, then back up, and it does not signal the ADC controller that it was rebooted.
ReVerify: Click to reverify all IDs from the video disk. This action removes all IDs from the Device
Storage Window that are not in any list look ahead, (no ‘*’ in the USED column) then reads all
IDs from the video disk and puts them into the Device Storage Window.
This should only be used if you suspect the Device Storage Window does not have the correct
IDs in it (they should only be what is in the disk or to be recorded or transferred in to the disk).
Before doing this note the ID count and any suspected IDs or lack of IDs, and note if after the ID
List is re-read if the IDs in the Device Storage Window are different.
Using this function reduces the efficiency of the Auto Delete (Device Parameter Delete When
Full). It will still delete as needed, but the history of what spots were most recently used will be lost.
Reverify affects the most recently used information in the following way:
• The ID list sort mode is always set to FIFO. If the disk follows VDCP protocol, when selecting to Re-verify IDs against the disk storage, the video disk gives the IDs following the rule that,
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 130
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager oldest items are listed first, newest items are listed last. This maintains the usage frequency sequence.
• If the video disk doesn’t follow VDCP, the usage frequency sequence will be lost.
Trace Setting: Only Trace the Following IDs: Check to enable tracing of the communications for designated IDs. This gives more intelligent filtering of the data logged in order to limit the amount data produced in the log.
20. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
21. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
To Configure a GVG K2 Video Disk (API/IP Driver)
This driver configuration:
Provides IP API support for GVG K2
Allows control of multiple ports by a single driver
Provides an option for Serial communications for real time control
About Loop Playback Mode option
The Loop Playback Mode option can be selected/deselected: manually using K2 App Center or automatically using automation (i.e. send Set Loop Playback Mode command).
• If the Loop Playback Mode option is selected, the K2 will play only the first clip.
• If the Loop Playback Mode option is deselected, the K2 plays the list correctly.
To configure the GVG K2 Driver (API/IP)
1. Under Video Disk Servers (API/IP) in the Available pane (right pane), select the GVG K2 IP device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To
Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the GVG K2 IP Video Disk device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select
Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 131
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: The settings within the Global Section of the multi stream driver will have an effect upon all of the configured Streams. Unique settings may be stored per each Stream within the Stream configuration portion of the multi stream driver.
3. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select General. Available options may differ depending on the device selected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 132
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Device Name: Specify the name of the driver into the ADC1000NT configuration. Change this to the preferred name for the device, up to 16 characters. (Default: "K2TCP".) The device name identifies the disk port.
Note: When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options: Report Spot Shorter than Scheduled: Check to enable reporting.
Disable heart beat checking for device air protection: Enable/Disable heartbeat check.
Checked: The Driver will not check if the device lost heart beat.
Unchecked: The driver will sense the lost heart beat error and try to reset and reconnect with the device.
Recommendation: Uncheck unless the device can’t reply heart beat checking query command from driver.
4. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Communications. Use this tab to specify the TCP configuration.
Specify the following parameters as required:
IP: IP address of the controlled device. Default IP address is 127.0.0.1. User should type correct
IP address to establish connection with K2 Client. More than one copy of driver can use the same IP address (for example, if the ports of the K2 Client use the different Working Folders).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 133
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Port: This port number is defined in the Protocol Document and should not be changed
Log Setting: Disable Log Creation: This option is used to create a special Log file which can be very useful in debugging. By default, "Disable Log Creation" is selected (log is not created).
Uncheck to enable log creation.
5. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select K2ClientInfo. The driver will allow using only those ports, which are defined on this page.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Type of K2 Client: The "GVG K2 IP" driver can work with different types of K2 Clients. Select the type of client: SD or HD.
Number of Ports: Use the spin arrows to specify the number of available ports: Range is 2 - 4.
(The number of specified ports are enabled under Type of Ports. If 2 ports are specified Port 1 -
2 are enabled. If 3 ports are specified, then Ports 1 – 3 are enabled. If four ports are specified then ports 1 - 4 are enabled)
Types of Ports: Specify the type of port for each enabled port. Options are Player, Recorder,
Player/Recorder.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 134
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select WorkingFolder. The driver can work with any number of ports of the single K2 Client if they use the same Working Folder.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Current Working Folder: GVG K2 storage always has one folder – default, but the storage can be divided into any number of the folders.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 135
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
7. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Storage.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Automatically Delete From Disk When Full. The automation system ensures that the specified amount of free disk space is maintained. Material is deleted from the disk automatically, based on a first-entered, last-played formula. Example:
A disk has 1000 spots on it, numbered 1 through 1000. Spot 23 is played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1001. Spot 65 is then played, at which point it is assigned a new number of 1002. Each time a spot is played, it is incremented using this same sequence. As a result, spots that have been on the disk the longest without ever being played have the lowest numbers, and are deleted first. If material must be deleted on the disk, the lowest number would be deleted first, then the second lowest number, then the third lowest, etc. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Spots registered in the Lookahead are never automatically deleted.
Disk Space to Keep Free (Mins). The default is 10 minutes. The range is from 0 to 32,000 minutes. This parameter attempts to keep the disk with at least the entered number of minutes of disk space free. This prevents trying to record something larger than the available amount of time, then having to delete the unfinished (truncated) item. For playout, the default value is typically used. Set this to the size of the largest ID you expect to record if Automatically Delete
From Disk When Full is enabled. This parameter should be used in time delay and record event applications. It is not recommended to set the value below four minutes (since all space available numbers are estimates due to variable rates of compression on different video images). This parameter has no effect unless Automatically Delete From Disk When Full is enabled.
Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted: Enable/Disable deletion of In-Use clips.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 136
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Checked: (Recommended) Users can’t delete an ID when it is inside the lookahead of a list from any clients.
Unchecked: Users can delete any event from the disk storage collection window of clients.
Note: When "Prevents ‘In-Use’ Clips from Being Deleted" is enabled and the "Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window" is also enabled in the "Storage Options" tab of the Air Client, attempting to delete in-use clips in the Device Storage Window results in a confirmation popup.
Clicking OK on the Confirm message will not result in these in-use clips being deleted. This applies to in-use clips that are not Protected and are not in a CUED state.
8. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Ports.
Configure the following parameter as required:
Additional Port Of Same Disk: Use this parameter to perform A/B routing between the different ports of the same K2 device. Select the additional port from the drop down list.
IMPORTANT: If this option is to be used, create two copies of K2 driver, which are controlling the same K2 Client.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 137
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
9. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Reporting. Options on this page allow setting types of messages, which are displayed in Status Bar in Air Client
Configure the following parameters as required:
Disk Specific Warnings. Displays diagnostic messages used for software development and debugging. If a specific problem or suspected bug is noticed, turn on this setting. If a disk diagnostic message appears when the problem occurs, the diagnostic code associated with the message should be reported to Automation Support. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Items Automatically Deleted or Recorded. This setting should only be used to verify or test that the disk is functioning properly. When enabled, diagnostic messages are only written to the error log at a client computer (if the client is configured to write error log files) when a spot is deleted, recorded or played from this disk port. Default is disabled (unchecked).
10. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select a Port 1 – Port 4.
The selections for Port 1- Port 4 provide the same configuration criteria. Use these selections to set up channel count and type of each channel..
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 138
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
A Port on the Device Driver represents a media input or output on the physical device. It is possible to have two or more instances of a driver in a single Device Server. The only limitation – all instances should control different ports.
Specify the following parameters as required:
Port Type: From the dropdown list select the port type. Options are Player, Recorder,
Player/Recorder.
This option specifies the way of using selected ports (not their physical type). This drop-down list contains alternatives, available for the current port according to information specified on page "K2ClientInfo" in Global parameters. For example, if Port 1 is physically player/recorded port, it can be used in driver as player, recorder or player/recorder port. But if it’s only player
(recorder) port, it can be used only as player (recorder).
Note: The Physical type of each port of the controlling K2 device is chosen on "K2ClientInfo" of the Global parameters.
Port Reinitialize: If a port becomes non-responsive to Automation commands, then click this button to reinitialize a single port. This does not impact other ports when selected or pressed.
Note: To reinitialize the whole driver use Reinitialize button at Diagnostics tab.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 139
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
11. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select General.
Configure the following parameters as required:
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name (Default: K2TCP). When an event is threaded, the head number is added to the name.
The name is also used to identify the stream used to execute secondary data events. If a stream’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Options.
• Stop Disk Play/Record on Init: When enabled (checked) a stop command is issued to the disk whenever the Device Server is started or the port is re-initialized.
• When disabled (unchecked), the device continues playing/recording, while the driver is being reinitialized. The Device Server connects to the video disk port if it can. If it cannot, the port must manually be re-initialized on the Device Server (under System, Diagnostics).
• When disabled, it is the operator’s responsibility to check the port status in the Device
Status Window and the IDs in the Device Storage Window and re-initialize if required.
Default is enabled (checked).
Note: Some sites prefer to DISABLE on ports the play to Air, and also Auto Record List ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 140
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
12. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select PreRolls/PostRolls.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Instant Prerolls.
The Instant feature is designed for coming out of a live or upcounting event as fast as possible when the next event has a near instant preroll. If you are using a master control switcher, the preroll must not be shorter than the shortest preroll supported by the switcher.
• Use Instant Prerolls. When enabled, Instant Play Preroll is activated by pressing the Instant button or Roll Now button on the control panel. This function has a default of zero seconds,
20 frames. The K2 AMP cannot guarantee the instant preroll in 4 frames, so 20 frames are set as default value. Values up to 15 frames, but not less, can be tried.
IMPORTANT:
The preroll must be set to at least the minimum switcher preroll or the disk port may start playing before the switcher switches.
The preroll also must be set to at least four frames greater than the Disk Preroll and Number of Frames to Send Play Early. If not configured properly, the list may stop, or Roll Now may not work as expected, but take a longer time than desired.
If Instant Preroll is set longer than the List Preroll, instant play is actually a delayed play. ADC operations rely on list preroll settings configured through the Options menu, in Configure
Lists.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Specify values up to 15 frames, but not less.
Device Postroll.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 141
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Use Postroll. Default: Disabled, zero seconds, four frames. Range: four frames to 59 seconds. When enabled, this settings overrides other configured postroll settings. Device postroll, if enabled, must be set to at least 4 frames.
This feature allows the list to use one postroll for VTRs, cart machines, and other devices, and a different postroll for video disks. The Device Postroll can be longer or shorter than the list postroll. Its main purpose is to clear out the disk status line quickly after the disk stops playing, so the status line can be loaded with the next event to cue. This allows small spots to be played back to back.
If the Device Postroll was set to a larger value, and the disk had over recorded the ID compared to the play duration, the disk would continue to play for the post roll duration if on air play switched to another device. This would permit mix effects during the post roll of the disk device into the play out from another device.
• Seconds. Select a value of up to 59 seconds.
• Frames. Select a value of at least 4 frames.
Note: The Seconds and Frames values have no effect unless the Use Postroll box is enabled
(checked).
Note: The settings for Frames To Send Play Early and Frames to Send Record Early are located within the Prerolls/Postrolls tab within the Global section.
13. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select Storage.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Delete IDs After Play. Deletes a played event from the video disk as soon as they have been played in Air Client transmission list. This is typically only enabled for testing or when recording for a one-time playout. Default is disabled (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 142
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To use the "Delete IDs after Play" option, ensure "Prevents In-Use Clips from Being deleted" option is disabled at the Global storage parameters group
14. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select Recording. This dialog is available only for Recorder or Player/Recorder port and is grayed out for Player port.
About Recording Clips: To record a clip, streams/ports must be assigned and used in the appropriate order:
Stream/Port 1 - rec
Stream/Port 2 - review
Note: A clip cannot be recorded if both streams/ports are assigned to one Media list, but the review device isn't assigned in Media Client.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of record qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled. The recording qualifiers are effective on record events and caching, and Secondary Record Device Events. This is useful in caching to record only IDs that are commercials as they are short and not program material
(program material normally has a segment number). Default is disabled.
Allow Recording.
• Recording of Record Events. Allows recording of record events or other types of recordings.
When disabled, the disk port will not record. Recording with segment play enabled is equivalent to performing an insert edit or assemble record, depending on the SOM (if the video disk server supports this function).
• Record Only No Playout. When enabled, this port will not play any material. This was added to the software so a port can be assigned to a playlist for recording, with a separate port assigned for playout. Without enabling this parameter, if one port goes down, the other
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 143
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager port will try to do both (record and playout). Since it cannot do both at the same time, the list will not work properly. Default is disabled.
Disable Recording With Segments. If enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Record Only Segments. Record only events with non-blank segment fields. If not enabled, the disk port will not record any event with a segment number in it.
Prevent Recordings Greater Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a maximum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is greater than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Prevent Recordings Less Than (Mins). Check to enable, then specify a minimum length (in minutes) for any recording. When this parameter is enabled, the disk port will not record any ID whose duration is less than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
Only Record Events with ID in. Check to enable, then specify the event range ’--to--‘ limits.
When enabled, the disk will only record IDs whose first character is between or equal to the limits. Numeric and alphabetic entries (upper and lower case ) are permitted.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be recorded, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To record only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters. ’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
The ID qualifier is useful where some IDs are recorded and others not, and the Duration and
Segment qualifiers cannot distinguish between them. The traffic system can designate a certain range of IDs that will be cached or recorded only.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 144
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
15. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select Qualifiers. Use this tab to set playing event qualifiers.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Any combination of qualifiers may be used, or they all may be disabled.
Playing Event Qualifiers: Event qualifier means playlist events must satisfy the selected qualifier before being allowed to play out through this VDCP port. If they do not pass the qualifier check, the event is not registered to this port, and is not allowed to play.
• Primary Event: Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows primary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Secondary to this VDCP disk port, and register Primary events to other devices, such as VTR.
• Secondary event (without Data Event): Select (check) this option, if this VDCP disk port allows secondary events to play.
Deselect (uncheck) this option, if a playlist has both Primary and Secondary events, and the user wants to only register Primary to this VDCP disk port, and register Secondary events to other devices, such as VTR.
Duration Range: If a duration qualifier is enabled then the disk port will not play any ID whose duration is greater (or less) than the number of minutes specified in parameter.
• No Events Greater Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
• No Events Less Than (Mins): Check to enable, then specify number of minutes in the associated number field (use spin arrows to increment / decrement).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 145
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
ID Range: If the ID qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only play IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
This qualifier is useful where some IDs are to be played and others not, and the Duration qualifier cannot distinguish between them.
• Only Events with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field.
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be played, enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To play only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• No Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field.
For example: To ignore and not play IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• from -- to --: Alphanumeric entry. Specify range for the two options. Up to 32 characters can be entered in each field.
’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
16. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select Segments. Options on this dialog describe the driver’s behavior for events with segments (Multi Segment).
Configure the following parameters as required:
Enable Cue with Data: Enable this function only if your video disk server supports this function.
• This is only enabled to play a part of an ID. It is similar to playing segments of a program or show.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 146
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
When enabled, the disk port uses the event’s SOM (start of message) to play or record individual segments of program material. For example, enable this setting if you want to play a program or news item in several parts. However, the different video disk devices implement this feature in various ways. For further details, refer to the documentation on your video disk device. Default is disabled (unchecked).
• This feature must be enabled to play or record individual segments of program material.
Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters). Up to two characters can be added to IDs. Useful for multi-segment recording, this option causes the ID on a video disk to be appended with either 1 or 2 characters to distinguish the segments.
If you never use more than 9 segments in any ID, select 1 character (which allows up to 9 segments). If you select 2 characters here, a maximum of 99 segments is allowed. Valid numbers are 0, 1, and 2. Default is 0.
Example: If Modify Segment IDs (# of Characters) were set to 2, a 3-segment ID titled "spot" would reside on the video disk as "spot01," "spot02," and "spot03." If the disk has a maximum of 32 characters allowed for an ID, the ID is truncated on the disk if the ID takes up 30 or more characters (2 characters are lost to allow for the 2 segment characters).
Segment Play Search path: Use this parameter to specify segmented program ID search through various settings of the Modify ID parameter. For media play out, the first valid setting is used.
The list permits each setting to be individually enabled or disabled, and for the order in which they are checked to be defined. Populating the search path with a single entry matching the fixed settings allows operation identical to current behavior.
Select a listed segment then use the associated buttons to arrange:
• Up / Down: Use these buttons to position the segment in the list.
• Enable: Use this buttons to enable a selected segment.
• Disable: Becomes active when Enable is selected. Use this button to disable a selected segment.
• Cue: Becomes active when Enable is selected.
• Cue with Data: Becomes active when Cue is selected
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of segments with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT.
• Default setting is disabled.When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission
List treats this event like any other missing event.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 147
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
17. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select Spots.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Reject Blank SOM: Check to enable rejection of single spots with blank SOM.
Reject Blank or Zero Duration: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) rejection of events with null durations.
• When disabled (unchecked), the driver behaves as it currently does. o
Events are Blue on the Transmission List o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations miss at time of play o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations are marked missed on the asrun log. o
Events with 00:00:00.00 durations generate an Error with the message "EVENT NOT
PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND OR BLANK SOM OR DUR" o
Events with blank (NULL) durations play without stop until the end of physical clip, then they are marked RAN SHORT. o
Default setting is disabled.
• When enabled (checked) the VDCP object will not register to play any event in the transmission list that has a blank or 00:00:00.00 Duration. (With default colors, these events remain RED on the Transmission List and do not play). The Transmission List treats this event like any other missing event.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 148
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
18. In the navigation pane expand a Port 1 – Port 4 and then select E to E.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Send Disk EE Mode Commands. (Default: disabled) These commands are only supported on certain video disks. Do not enable unless you are sure they are supported in your version.
When enabled, Automaton will send EE commands to the port when it starts and stops playing.
This effectively makes the video disk a video player and insert switcher if the input to the port is a primary video feed, and the video disk is controlled by a ‘break away’ list. Once the video disk receives an EE command, it enters an EE controlled mode where it no longer controls the internal switcher. If EE commands are then disabled, the video disk software must be stopped and restarted so it will control the internal switcher automatically again.
Frames to Send EE On Early. (Default: 2) Enter the number of frames that the EE ON command should be sent early. This box is ignored unless the Send Disk EE Mode Commands box is enabled (checked).
Frames to Send EE Off Early. (Default: 3) Enter the number of frames that the EE OFF command should be sent early. This box is ignored unless the Send Disk EE Mode Commands box is enabled (checked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 149
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
19. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Disk Status. The Disk Status tab is informational only. No user-configurable settings are available in this tab. Click the Refresh tab to update the displayed information.
Disk Status Parameters:
• Selected ports shows numbers of ports, which are configured via this driver by user.
• Returned ports displays numbers of ports, which have been really configured and correctly reply to commands. For example, if user configured 1st and 2nd ports via K2 IP driver, but
1st port has AMP protocol and 2nd port has VDCP protocol on K2 Client, only 1st port will be shown in "Returned ports".
• Port Initialized (or "Port Initializing") indicates whether initialization process has been finished.
• Ports Opened shows amount of ports, specified on page "K2ClientInfo".
• Disk Not Full (or "Disk Full") and Archive Not Full (or "Archive Full") show condition of disk and archive. o
Under label "Disk Not Full" there is label with the type of device controlled by this driver.
• Spots in Disk shows amount of clips in current working folder.
• Disk Free and Max Record display free space and free continuous space in timecode format.
• Minutes Free In Disk shows free space in minutes.
• Minutes Signal Free shows critical amount of free minutes in disk, when the video disk is considered to be full (it is specified on page Storage in Global parameters).
Refresh: Press this button to obtain current information about the device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 150
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
20. In the navigation pane expand the Global entry and then select Diagnostics.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Diagnostics.
• Reinitialize: Click to reinitialize the device/port. Executing this Global action will impact
(stop) any in-progress play/record operations of all configured ports. It will clear the disk status lines, clear all spots in the Device Storage Window, and then initialize the disk port.
IMPORTANT: If a specific port stream requires a Re-Init, then the user should click on the specific port name in the Config Device Tool and press the Reinitialize button on that configuration tab.
This should only be done if the disk is not recording or playing on air, and it is felt something is hung up in the software.
A Reinit may be required if the videodisk communications program is brought down, then back up, and it does not signal the ADC controller that it was rebooted.
• ReVerify: Click to reverify all IDs from the video disk. This action removes all IDs from the
Device Storage Window that are not in any list look ahead, (no ‘*’ in the USED column) then reads all IDs from the video disk and puts them into the Device Storage Window.
This should only be used if you suspect the Device Storage Window does not have the correct IDs in it (they should only be what is in the disk or to be recorded or transferred in to the disk).
Before doing this note the ID count and any suspected IDs or lack of IDs, and note if after the ID List is re-read if the IDs in the Device Storage Window are different.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 151
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Using this function reduces the efficiency of the Auto Delete (Device Parameter Delete
When Full). It will still delete as needed, but the history of what spots were most recently used will be lost.
21. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
22. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
N+1 Video Server Redundancy Configuration
(Virtual Pool Driver)
Air/Protect is a popular and widely used feature of ADC. However it is a 1-to-1 protection of devices, requiring dedicated main and redundant playout devices. Many facilities, however, do not want to incur the expense of purchasing redundant playout devices for each transmission path, especially for less critical sub-channels. However it is still of operational importance to be able to protect these channels against the critical failure of an on-air device.
N+1 Video Server Redundancy implements a new special multiport Virtual Pool Driver (VPD) that provides the ability to configure a single device (N+1) or group of devices (N+M) that can be used to assume playout responsibilities in the advent of the critical failure of an on-air device. (i.e. the Virtual
Pool Driver (VPD) collects a few video server drivers and provides them as protect devices once air device fails.)
About Other Protect Functions:
- Disable the Protect button from the Control Panels (Hardware and Software) as this is an unsupported function.
- There is also a Protect option in the List Context Menu, that cannot be disabled as it is for the next event, not the currently playing one.
(N+M) Protection Concept
Using the new virtual protected device driver, one instance of the driver protects N device drivers assigned to N playlists. Since a single list might have more than one device assigned to it, and each must be individually protected, mapping is not per list, but per device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 152
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
This virtual driver has M ports. To provide M<N protection the virtual driver looks like a container (pool) for M "real" device drivers (Pr.Driver 1...M), and each port of the Virtual Driver is a port of any "real" device driver. Currently, there is a limit of 20 heads per device- which limits a single virtual driver to protecting a maximum of 10 real devices.
Note: To support back to back play, the streams noted are in fact two heads.
When the N-th driver fails while playing the M-th playlist, the driver requests its own protected device, which is the new Virtual Pool Driver. This determines the first available free port in its pool which can provide the needed media spot and occupies the port. From this moment the port becomes non-free.
After playing out an event using the spot from the Virtual Pool Driver, the driver releases the port and makes it free. If the VirtualDriver can't provide a media spot by any free port it has, the playing of the corresponding list fails.
Driver Configuration
Virtual Pool Driver (VPD) collects a few video server drivers and provides them as protect devices should the on air device fail.
1. From Configuration utility, right-click on the Device Server icon and select the Configured Devices item to display the "Configured Devices" window.
2. From the list on the right hand pane select "Protect Pool Device" from the "Protect Pool Devices" category. Use the mouse pointer to drag this item to one of the available "No Device" lines on the left side of the Configured Device Window.
Example: The following image shows a configuration containing three air device (AIRDEV1, AIRDEV2,
AIRDEV3 channels 7,8 and 9 respectively), a virtual device on the 15th channel with three ports has a pool of two devices PROTDEV1 PROTDEV2
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 153
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
IMPORTANT: Do not assign crosspoints to the Pool device.
3. On the configured pane right click on the Protect Pool Device and form the context menu select
Properties.
4. Select the General Tab. Use this tab to specify the Virtual Pool Device name.
5. Select the Devices Tab. Use this tab to associate the protect devices(s) with available devices.
Select a device and/or stream form the Available pane and click <Add to Pool.
Use Up and Down buttons to arrange listing entries in the Pool pane. The list order determines which free driver in a pool is selected first.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 154
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To remove an entry from the Pool pane click Remove. The entry is returned to the Available pane.
Virtual Ports: Use spin arrows to set how many ports this Virtual driver can provide.
Cueing Offset (sec): Specify the offset value the delay requires (in seconds) to allow the protect device to cue and play when it takes over.
6. Select the Runway Lists tab. A protect device needs a "runway" to process all stages from "standby" to "playing". Use this tab to designate runway lists that will provide continuous playing out without stopping in order to prepare a Real Protect Device (RPD) for playing. It is possible to have a small runway list pool; its size can be less than protect device pool, thus a few RPDs can share one runway list.
Note: For more information see also About Runway Lists.
Select a list from the Available pane and click <Add to Pool.
Use Up and Down buttons to arrange listing entries in the Runway List Pool pane. The list order determines which list in a pool is selected first.
To remove an entry from the Runway List Pool pane click Remove. The entry is returned to the
Available pane.
About Runway Lists: In general a runway list is used as a staging point for content prior to its being moved into a Transmission List for playout.
• The maximum number of runway lists (4) is defined in "Userconc.inc" file as:
MAXRUNWAYLISTS=4;
• It is impossible to assign any available media source to a runway list on "List Assignments" screen.
• Only runway lists are available on "Runway Lists" tab of Pool Driver properties dialog.
• A runway list is available in Air Client as a generic transmission list. It is possible to watch events on it. However it is protected against an operator’s manual intervention. The following manual actions are prohibited on this list type:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 155
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations o insert, revise, edit, delete an event o load, insert, append a list o open the control panel
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
List Assignment
Pool streams are assigned to lists as required, protect streams are ports of a (Virtual Protect Device). List assignments and air-protected device configuration are performed in the usual manner.
Note: Pool Streams can be added to any list type except Runway Lists.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 156
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To configure A/V tables for a general pool device
For each playlist use the following procedure to configure the correct switching if the Pool device contains 2 or more devices.
1. For the main disk the A/V table is populated as follows (for example):
2. Protect line must be empty.
3. For all protect disk the A/V table is populated as follows (for example):
4. Output crosspoint is defined in run time dynamically.
VTR Configuration (General)
The following is an example video tape recorder (VTR) configuration. Your VTR may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 157
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
To Configure a VTR
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
1. Under VTRs in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured
Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see
"To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the VTR device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Note: The parameters displayed depend on the device selected.
Device Name: Enter a name for the VTR to help you identify the VTR during event transmission.
The name can have up to 16 characters. The device name has no relation to the ID of any tape inserted in the VTR.
Options.
• Standbyoff for Tension Release: This parameter forces the software to issue a Standby Off command to the VTR. In Sony Betacam decks, a tension release command is used. The setting on this parameter does not affect digital and one inch VTRs - these VTRs always receive the Standby Off command when issued. Default is disabled (unchecked).
• Eject on Initialization: A stop command is issued to the VTR whenever the Device Server is started or the port is re-initialized. Default is disabled (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 158
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Keep Media in VTR: A tape inserted in a VTR is retained by the VTR (not ejected). The tape can then only be manually ejected. This feature allows the VTR to behave as if it has a storage location to hold a tape - like a cart machine.
Use caution when selecting this parameter for VTRs that are used as record decks for the compiler. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Edit Compensation:
• Edit On / Edit Off: These edit compensations are a frame latency value for how long the VTR takes to respond to either enabling or disabling the edit.
Leave these Edit Compensation values at 2 unless you are experiencing problems. If you intend to change these values, contact Automation Support.
• Sync Adjust: This parameter adjusts the sync play value for external VTRs (Sony and Ampex protocols).The Sync Adjust setting has a default of zero and should never have to be
changed. However, if it needs to be changed, the value can be changed from -20 to 20
frames.
A positive value causes the tape to come up to speed past the SOM by the specified
number of frames at the end of preroll.
A negative value causes the tape to come up to speed before the SOM by the specified
number of frames at the end of preroll.
Tape Speed Control Options for Media List:
Note: This entry appears on all VTR setup tabs. This option need only be set once. Since the option is in a separate box, though it shares the same tab page as other setup options, when a
different tab is selected, the option and its setting remains.
CAUTION: There is no hard rule for which option works with which VTR. When using these controls, if one option doesn’t produce the desired result, try the other option.
When a VTR (or tape machine) starts running, its speed increases from 0 to a stable level.
However, this transient time to the stable level is not constant and is tape machine dependent.
When a clip in the tape is to be recorded to a video disk server, it requires that the record command to the disk record port be frame accurate so that the first recorded screen of a clip in the video disk server is also SOM frame.
Because of variant VTR transient times, without software control, a recorded clip can be a few frames off.
• Tape Speed Overwrite: If absolute frame accuracy is not required, this option can be used.
When this parameter is enabled, the system changes the speed of the VTR machine to hit the time of playing the SOM frame at the time a record command is sent to video disk server record port.
This method typically results in 80% to 90% frame accurate recording.
Note: This option setting is typically required when using Invenio Capture for ingest.
• Sampling Tape Time Code: For frame accurate recording, check this option. By default, this option is enabled.
When this parameter is enabled, instead of controlling VTR speed, the system controls the time to send the record command by sampling time code on the tape. When the sampling value shows that the VTR speed is constant, the system calculates the time of sending out the record command.
This method can result in 100% frame accurate recording.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 159
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The option is saved to the mclient.ini file and does not need to be checked again after next launch, or when the next setup tab is selected.
Note: This option is also for GMT list.
Ignore "Audio data error level no good": (For Sony only.) Check to ignore this error.
Frame Calibration to Record Device: This parameter allows adjusting the timing in the VTR driver to get frame accurate recording. Selecting OK saves this parameter setting to the INI file for future use.
Example Use:
1)Set the parameter "Frames To Send Record Early" on the disk (destination device) configuration.
2)Select one VTR as the source device and perform autocopy.
3)Check the first recorded frame (this should be the SOM frame), and adjust the VTR parameter "Frame Calibration To Record Device".
4)Select another VTR as the source device and perform autocopy.
5)Check the first recorded frame (this should be the SOM frame), and adjust the second VTR parameter.
4. Select the Serial Port tab. (This tab is present when Sony and Panasonic VTR types are being configured).
Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected.
Port setting: Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 160
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
5. Select VTR Offset tab. (This tab is used to specify the offset parameter for DVC Pro.)
Configure the following parameters as required:
One (1) for 25 MBPS: (Default 0) use spin arrows to set the offset.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 161
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. Select Diagnostics tab. (This tab appears when VTR type Demo VTR is selected and being configured.)
Configure the following parameters as required:
ID: The device name identifies the VTR port. The default VTR name is VTR1. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character – the head number - is added to the name.
Compile ID: The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed.
Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Inject button: Click to inject IDs to tape.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 162
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
7. Select VTR Type tab. This tab displays information about the VTR, including the model number, protocol ID, cassette size, analog/digital, and if extended errors are reported.
Refresh button: Click the Refresh button to update the information display.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 163
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
8. Select Compile tab. (Extended VTR only) This tab allows selection of the channels to compile for
Audio editing.
9. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
10. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Cart Machine Configuration (General)
The following is an example cart machine configuration. Your cart machine may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User
Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 164
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
To Configure a Cart Machine
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
1. Under Cart Machines in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Cart Machine device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select
Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab. Available options may differ depending on the device selected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Enter a name (using up to 16 characters) for the cart machine. This name is used to identify the cart machine during event transmission.
Options.
• Eject on Initialization: A stop command is issued to the cart machine whenever the Device
Server is started or the port is re-initialized. Default is disabled (unchecked).
• Enable VTR 1-6: This parameter allows you to select which VTRs are available for use. In the
Enable VTR window, if a VTR is not selected, the VTR is not used by the ADC Device Server
(or the cart machine). This is useful when using a cart machine VTR for some other operation or when the device is broken. To start using a deselected VTR, make sure this VTR is selected in the Enable VTR window. Default is 4 VTRs enabled.
• Keep Media in VTR: A tape inserted in a VTR is retained by the VTR (not ejected). The tape can then only be manually ejected. This feature allows the VTR to behave as if it has a storage location to hold a tape - like a cart machine.
Sync Adjust: This parameter adjusts the sync play value for external VTRs (Sony and Ampex protocols). The Sync Adjust setting has a default of zero and should never have to be changed.
However, if it needs to be changed, the value can be changed from -20 to 20 frames. A positive value causes the tape to come up to speed past the SOM by the specified number of frames at
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 165
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager the end of preroll. A negative value causes the tape to come up to speed before the SOM by the specified number of frames at the end of preroll.
Door Error Delay: (for Flexicart): Specify the delay before reporting a Door Open error.
Sampling VTR Time Code: Use this parameter for selecting TSO method or "Frame Accurate
Recording" method. When it is selected, "Frame Accurate Recording" method is used.
Otherwise, TSO method is used. This option is applied to all the VTRs inside the cart machine. By default, it is unchecked. The selection is also saved to mclient.ini file for next launch
StandByOff When Tension Release: Check to enable. This parameter forces the software to issue a Standby Off command to the VTR. In Sony Betacam decks, a tension release command is used. The setting on this parameter does not affect digital and one inch VTRs - these VTRs always receive the Standby Off command when issued. Default is disabled (unchecked).
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select Editor Parameters tab.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 166
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
VTR 1 – 6 button: Click on a desired VTR to edit its compensation properties. The following box appears:
• Edit On / Edit Off: Leave these Edit Compensation values at 2 unless you are experiencing problems.
If you intend to change these values, contact automation Support.
• Keep Media in VTR: Enable (check) to have the device retain (i.e. not eject) the media.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 167
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Four Channel Audio: Enable audio recording on four channels instead of the normal two channels. Default is disabled (unchecked).
6. Select VTR Parameters tab. (This tab is available for Odetics Cart Machines.)
Configure the following parameters as required:
VTR 1 – 6 button: Click on a desired VTR to edit its compensation properties. The VTR
Configuration dialog box appears:
• Select General tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 168
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Standbyoff for Tension Release: This parameter forces the software to issue a Standby Off command to the VTR. In Sony Betacam decks, a tension release command is used. The setting on this parameter does not affect digital and one inch VTRs - these VTRs always receive the Standby Off command when issued. Default is disabled (unchecked).
Edit Compensation: This parameter adjusts the sync play value for external VTRs (Sony and
Ampex protocols). The Sync Adjust setting has a default of zero and should never have to be changed. However, if it needs to be changed, the value can be changed from -20 to 20 frames. A positive value causes the tape to come up to speed past the SOM by the specified number of frames at the end of preroll. A negative value causes the tape to come up to speed before the SOM by the specified number of frames at the end of preroll.
Leave the Edit Compensation values at 2 unless you are experiencing problems. If you intend to change these values, contact Automation technical support.
• Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 169
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Select VTR Offset tab (Used by DVC Pro) to specify the offset parameter:
Configure the following parameters as required:
One (1) for 25 MBPS: (Default 0) use sin arrows to set the offset.
• Select VTR Type tab. This tab displays information about the VTR, including the model number, protocol ID, cassette size, analog/digital, and if extended errors are reported.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 170
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Refresh button: Click the Refresh button to update the information display.
7. Select Qualifiers tab. Use this tab to specify what types of material may be played out by the cart machine on each playlist.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 171
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The Qualifiers option is particularly important in GMT environments where some of a cart machine’s
VTRs are assigned to the playlist and others are assigned to the GMT list for baseband caching to a video server. For example, if two of a cart machine’s four VTRs are assigned to play Events With
Segments Only on the playlist, then any missing single-spot clips requested for caching will be played out only by the two VTRs assigned to the GMT list. If the qualifiers are not set, any missing singlespot clips will be registered with the cart machine for direct playout, instead of being registered with the playlist’s Requester for caching. If the missing clip is not found in the cart machine, the event will remain red on the playlist and be missed.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 172
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Select a playlist and then click the Edit button. A properties sheet opens with playout qualification parameters: No Events With Segments, Events With Segments Only, No Events
Greater Than xx (Mins.), No Events Less Than xx (Mins.), Only Events With ID in [an ASCII character range – the first character of the ID].
The individual VTRs in the cart machine may be assigned to different lists with different qualifiers. One VTR may be assigned to Playlist1 and only allowed to play segmented events, while another VTR assigned to Playlist2 is only allowed to play single-spot tapes. The qualifiers apply to playlists globally – any VTRs assigned to that list will be subject to the same playout qualifications.
8. Select Diagnostics tab.
The Diagnostics tab has several different functions depending on the make and model of cart machine.
For example:
The Betacart’s Diagnostics tab, contains one button: Reinitialize (device). All Automation cart machine objects contain this option.
The Odetics TCS90’s Diagnostics tab, contains two buttons: Reinitialize (device) and Reverify
(storage).
The SmartCart’s Diagnostics tab, contains three buttons: Reinitialize (device), Reverify (storage), and Reinitialize (elevator).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 173
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Reinitialize button: Click to reinitialize the device. Confirm your selection when prompted.
The cart machine is reinitialized. The storage collection for the cart machine is cleared and any tapes in the VTRs are ejected (if Eject On Initialization has been selected on the General tab). All the bins are re-verified by the barcode reader and the automation’s storage collection is rebuilt.
WARNING: This can be a risky and time-consuming procedure. Do not attempt a reinitialization unless the customer can afford to be without a cart machine for an extended period of time.
Depending on the size of the cart machine and the number of bins available, reinitialization could take up to several hours!
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 174
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Reverify button: This is a less disruptive procedure that a full reinitialization. ReVerify allows the cart machine to continue operating while it reverifies the contents of its bins and VTRs. This is a background procedure and the normal loading, unloading and playout of tapes will continue without interruption. The automation system’s storage collection remains intact, but its data is updated as each bin is reverified. New tapes should not be loaded or unloaded from the cart machine through the I/O door (load/unload bins) until the reverification process has completed.
• Bin By Bin: Select to specify reverify content on a bin-by-bin basis
• Column By Column: Select to specify reverify content on a column by column.
Init Elevator button: This performs a hardware reinitialization of the elevator robot mechanism.
This should be used when problems are encountered and the operator has had to open the door and physically remove a tape from the robot.
9. Select Manual Mode tab. (This tab is available only for Panasonic SmartCart and all Odetics cart machines.)
Configure the following parameter as required:
Manual Elevator Mode: When this mode is enabled (checked), the robot mechanism is placed offline for maintenance and the operator becomes the replacement for the robot.
• This must be accomplished with the main door open so that the operator may access the storage bins and VTRs.
• Prompting is given to indicate when tapes need to be loaded into VTRs from the cart machine’s library or removed from VTRs and replaced into the tape library.
• It is necessary to enable the Pop up Diagnostic Window from the Preferences / Errors menu on the Air Client being used. This allows the prompting messages to appear on that client only.
• Other clients are not affected.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 175
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Each pop up window must be closed before the next diagnostic message is displayed. This insures that no messages are missed and that tapes are moved in the order they are needed by the VTRs.
10. Select Tape Handling tab. Use this tab to specify the Label Length. (This tab is available for Odetics and Marc SmartCart Cart Machines.)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Odetics: Label Length: Specify label length. (Range: 4 – 8). The length is the number of characters. Odetics labels have a certain number of prepended characters that must be truncated.
Marc Smart Cart: Use Labels as Read: Check to enable using label content as read.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 176
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
11. Select Robotics Arms tab. This option is only available for the Odetics TCS-2000.
Configure (check) to place one or more gripper arms offline. The elevator robot will continue to function, and the automation will not use any gripper arms that are disabled. The TCS-2000 can function with only one gripper arm enabled, but its speed and efficiency will be greatly reduced.
12. Select Robot tab. (Available for Marc 400-MII Cart, only.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 177
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Specify the following functionality as required. Configure to enable (check) the Primary and or
Auxiliary Elevator. The elevator robot will continue to function, and the automation will not use any elevator that is disabled.
Enable Primary Elevator: Select (check) to enable.
Enable Auxiliary Elevator: Select (check) to enable.
13. Select Linkage tab. (Available for Odetics TCS90M, TSC90LEM, and TCS90A devices, only.) From the dropdown list on tab specify a linkage device from the list of available devices.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 178
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
14. Select Tools tab. (Available for demo BetaCart and demo DVC1000 devices, only.) Since no tape is actually being used with a demo device, the tape ID and title are entered here. With an actual device, this action is unnecessary, as the automation system can read this information off either a barcode or from the database record.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Insert and Remove Tapes.
• ID: Enter the ID of the tape to be inserted or removed.
• Title: Enter the title of the tape to be inserted or removed.
• Bin Location (A1-A40): Select the slot in the cart machine to add the tape to or remove the tape from.
• Insert button: Click to insert a tape.
• Remove button: Click to remove a tape.
Hidden Bins.
• Load Text File: The Load Text File button is used to load list of material Ids with duration and title into bins based on bin ID.
• Purge: Click to remove the content of the bins respectively.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 179
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
15. Select Additional Tools tab. (Available for demo DVC1000 devices, only.) With an actual device, this action is unnecessary.
Select the following actions as required:
Communications: The "Fail" and "Restore" buttons are used to test communications.
• Fail: Click to turn the device off-line.
• Restore: Click to turn the device on-line and restore communications.
16. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
17. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 180
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
M/C Switcher Configuration (General)
In general, the Automation interface treats all makes and models of switchers as generic devices. The specific driver for a particular brand of switcher will communicate using that brand’s control protocol, but this is transparent to the automation system’s user.
The following is an example Master Control (M/C) switcher configuration. Depending on the specific brand and model of switcher, the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device, and there may be other configuration options not outlined here. Information regarding these options may be found in the user notes for the specific device.
• Switching under automation: The Automation system communicates with switchers via the devices’ native protocol. When a switch command is sent to a switcher, the automation sends a "switching triplet" consisting of the device number, the input number and the output number to the software object controlling the device. This "triplet" is then translated to the switcher’s own command language and the command is passed via the RS-422 serial connection to the device. This translated command may also contain transition information or audio mixer and keyer presets for a master control switcher, or the number of levels to switch for a router.
• About Audio Over Events: Some MC Switcher devices, such as Maestro and BrandMaster, can use the information in Audio Over events which cannot be included in # field. For these situations the
Title field of the Audio Over events can be used. When there is value of event title in audio mixer record, this value can be used by other drivers when they are performing audio over events and sending all necessary commands.
Note: Each MCSwitcher driver will use this functionality differently depending on its functions.
To Configure an M/C Switcher
1. Under M/C Switchers in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the M/C Switcher device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select
Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 181
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
3. Select General tab. Use this tab to enter a specific name for the device, specify the dimensions of the switcher, and compensate for any switcher latency.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Enter a name (using up to 16 characters) for the switcher. This name is used by the automation system to identify the switcher. Systems with multiple switchers should have each switcher assigned a unique name.
Dimensions.
• Input Crosspoints: Specify the input crosspoint on a cascaded switcher to which the device’s setting is connected. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 16.
• Output Crosspoints: Specify the output crosspoint on a cascaded switcher to which the device’s setting is connected. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 1.
Note on Utah MC2020: The MC-2020 is a 0-based switcher. Since ADC software is 1-based, all desired A/V port locations must be entered in the software as "A/V port +1." This includes all
VTR A/V information, as well as all source names in the source name table. Crosspoint values up to 64k are supported.
Switcher Latency: This parameter adjusts the latency of the switcher. The adjustment range depends on the device. Most range from -10 to +10 frames. However, the Versio MCS ranges from -15 to + 15.
• If the adjustment is positive, the switcher switches the entered number of frames later.
• If the adjustment is negative, the switcher switches the entered number of frames earlier.
The default value of zero is usually sufficient.
Adjust latency only if it has been determined that the switcher is indeed switching early or late.
Some switchers have a built-in latency of one frame and will always switch one frame late if this latency is not compensated for.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 182
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
4. Select Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select Socket Port tab. (For Versio MC) Use this tab to configure the driver’s TCP/IP connection.
Configure the following parameters as appropriate:
Socket Information: The NGC MCS driver is independent driver. Default IP address is 127.0.0.1
• Host: Enter the IP host address of the computer running the driver
• Port: Enter the IP port number on which the driver is running. Default port is 8890.
URL: Specify the URL for the Versio switcher. The setting is saved in "Adc1000nt.ini" file in order to be restored after Device Server restart.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 183
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• The commands are wrapped in the HTTP 1.1 protocol. The Versio Switcher requires all MC
XML commands be sent to this URL: http://127.0.0.1:8880/NGCSwitcher/NGCSwitcher.rest
• For this parameter "NGCSwitcher.rest" is the default string when working with real switcher.
However, the url can depend on switcher’s configuration.
• All unnecessary slashes (/ or \) in the beginning or in the end of this line are automatically removed. This means, for example, that string "/NGCSwitcher.rest", incorrectly typed by the user, is converted to the correct line "NGCSwitcher.rest".
Log Setting: The driver can create its own log file. This file can be created in the folder where
Device Server will be started from or forwarded to another computer.
• Enable: (Default: unchecked) Check to enable Log creation. When created the Log file will include all the commands from the driver to the NGC MCS device and from the NGC MCS device to the driver.
6. Select Communications tab. (For GVG MCS 1600, NVision MCS, Evertz E9625 MCS, Leitch Opus
MCS.) Use this tab to specify Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stops Bits, and Parity.
7. Select Sources tab. Use this tab to create a table of source names (mnemonics) associated with router or switcher inputs that the automation may use for record events. The source names table accepts multiple names for the same input number, but does not accept duplicate names for different inputs.
If a record event is placed on a record list, the source name may be entered in the title field. The automation compares this source name to the source names table and switches the designated input to the record device that has registered the event.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 184
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: For the Versio MCS Device the sources are assigned default values beginning with 1. Only the crosspoint number can be changed.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Note: For Versio MCS since operators can switch between the supported sources, the Add and
Delete buttons are disabled. It is possible to use the Edit button to change the source number only.
The value of the source number is valid during current TCP session. The list of sources is updated each time a new TCP session is created. The sources are set with default values starting with 1.
Add button: Click the Add button to enter a source crosspoint name and number.
• Crosspoint Name: Enter a mnemonic to help the operator identify the crosspoint.
• Number: Enter the physical connection number of the crosspoint.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 185
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Edit Button: To edit an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Edit. An edit dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected entry. Make changes as required, and then click OK.
Delete button: To delete an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Delete.
8. Select Key Parameters tab. (For TriKey-only)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Key Number Field Definition: Choose either "#" or "sSP" field in the playlist as the keyer number. The selection depends on the functionality of other switcher drivers that may be used in conjunction with the Trikkey. If the Trikkey is used as a keyer-only slave device expanding the capability of a master control switcher (i.e. a Saturn), then the convention should follow that of the master. Otherwise, this may be set based on preference of the user.
• # field of Event: This field has a range of 1 through 254
• sSP field of Event: This field has a range of 0 to 9
Start Key Number: Specify the first keyer number so that if Trikkey is used as a slave, the keyer number will not be in conflict with the numbering system in the master switcher (which always starts from one). (Default: 7, Minimum: 1).
9. Select Destinations tab. Use this tab to create a table of destination names that the automation primarily uses for secondary crosspoint switch events. The destination names table accepts multiple names for the same output number, but does not accept duplicate names for different outputs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 186
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If a secondary crosspoint switch event is placed on the playlist, the source and destination names may be entered in the title field using the format: source name:destination name (the colon is required)
The automation compares these names to the source and destination names tables and switch the designated input to the designated output at the appropriate time.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Add button: Launches the Add Destination Data dialog. Specify the CrossPoint Name, Number, and then click OK
• Crosspoint Name: The Crosspoint Name is a mnemonic to help the operator identify the crosspoint.
• Number: The physical connection number of the crosspoint.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 187
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Edit Button: To edit an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Edit. An edit dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected entry. Make changes as required, and then click OK.
Delete button: To delete an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Delete.
10. Select System Inputs tab. Use this tab to specify the switcher inputs for common sources such as
Black, Colorbars, Station ID, and Initial Input. All four inputs designated here may be switched manually from the diagnostic switch panel (see Switching Tab below). In addition, the Black and
Station ID inputs are used by the automation if the corresponding list settings, Switch to Black and
Station ID on Skip, are enabled on the List Configuration / Properties / Options tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
System Inputs: For each parameter specify a number from 0 to 32768 to indicate which crosspoints carry the black, colorbars, station ID and initial input signals. Default is 0. These options are not used by the automation system unless the corresponding list settings are enabled for Black Input and StationID.
• Black Input: When the Transmission List Option "Switch to Black" is selected, and the most recent event on the list was running on a device configured to use this router, then the crosspoint listed here (if non-zero) will be switched to the output crosspoint used by that event: o
If the list stops because of an error,
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 188
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager o
If the event ends and there is a Hard-Start delay until the next event begins, or o
If it ends normally and there are no more events on the list. o
If it is set to 0 then nothing will happen.
• Colorbars: This crosspoint is used only when the Colorbars button is pressed on the diagnostics control panel (Configuration Utility or Air Client). If it is set to 0 then the
Colorbars button will have no action.
• Station ID: When the Transmission List Option "Station ID on Skip" is selected, and the most recent event on the list was running on a device configured to use this router, then this crosspoint will be switched to the output crosspoint used by that event if an operator invokes Skip on the Air Client’s control panel. When the next event begins to play, the crosspoint is switched to whatever that event requires.
• Initial Input: This crosspoint will be switched to all outputs of the router when the Device
Server application is launched. If it is set to 0 then nothing will happen. In most cases it is recommended to leave this function disabled (0).
About Initial Input: The Initial Input source comes into play when communication is first established with the switcher or in the event of a switcher failure.
• If the switcher fails to switch for some reason – the switcher returns a NAK (i.e. a Negative
Acknowledgment because the command format is wrong) or no response to a switch command – the automation retries the switch command twice.
• If the switcher fails to switch after two retries, the automation attempts to reinitialize the switcher. It sends a command to switch to the designated Initial Input. In most cases, particularly if there are intermittent serial communication problems with the switcher, it may be safer to leave the Initial Input set to zero. That way, the automation will not attempt to reinitialize the switcher and possibly switch to black (or whatever has been designated as the Initial Input).
11. Select Effect Durations tab. To configure Effect durations in frames.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Slow: Specify a number from 0 to 999. Default is 60.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 189
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Medium: Specify a number from 0 to 999. Default is 30.
Fast: Specify a number from 0 to 999. Default is 15.
IMPORTANT: These durations, in frames, must match the effect durations configured in the switcher itself.
12. Select Reporting tab. Use this tab to enable reporting of the condition of the switcher to the error log.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Enable reporting for: There are three available options on the Reporting tab, depending on the amount of information that is necessary to be logged into the ADC error file when the router is used. The actual log is configured on the Air Client application, but the information supplied to the logging mechanism from the router driver is regulated here.
These parameters allow the switcher to generate an error whenever the switcher does not respond to a communication request. Place a check mark in each box to enable reporting
(default is disabled for all).
• Errors: Enables the logging of critical failures, such as the device failing to confirm that a transition command was executed, or when communication is lost with the router.
• Warnings: Enables the logging of other information reported by the router. The 1200 series routers do not provide such information to automation; so enabling Warnings will have no effect on the system.
• Crosspoint Changes: Enables the logging of each transition with a timestamp from when it occurred.
IMPORTANT: Normally these are left disabled, but can be enabled for diagnostic purposes. If reporting for Crosspoint Changes is enabled, the error log will quickly fill up with every crosspoint switch command the automation has sent to the switcher.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 190
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
13. Select Log tab.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
AsRun Log: This group enables As Run Logging of Manual Actions on Program, Keyer and Audio
Over Bus with the help of 3 check boxes: Select the type of bus to log: Program Bus, Keyer Bus,
Audio Over Bus.
Program Bus: When selected enables the manual change in PGM bus to be reported as an error or as a warning.
Keyer Bus: When selected enables the manual change in KEY bus to be reported as an error or as a warning.
Audio Over Bus: When selected enables the manual change in AUDIO OVER bus to be reported as an error or as a warning.
Contextual Error Message: When this box is checked and the user presses or releases Hold button, the Air Client displays the following additional error messages:
• "Manual Intervention of System"
• "Return to Automated Control of System"
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 191
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
14. Select Backup tab. Use this tab to designate another switcher as the backup to the main switcher in case of a failure. The switcher that is configured here will receive all of the transition commands that are sent to the main device. For this reason the Backup switcher must be wired identically to the
Main. There are other methods for driving a second switcher if this limitation cannot be accommodated.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Backup Switcher: Select from the dropdown list of available backup switchers. Use this parameter when installing a redundant switcher to act as backup if the main switcher fails. In the Configure Backup Switcher window, enter the number of the port that has the backup switcher connected to it (i.e. the device server channel number).
The main and backup switchers do not need to be the same model, but the backup should have dimensions large enough to back up all of the main switcher’s crosspoints. Both switchers must receive the same inputs. During playout, the backup switcher switches whenever the main switcher switches
The default is None (no backup switcher configured).
IMPORTANT: The backup switcher is switched simultaneously with the main switcher. The inputs on the backup switcher must match, in a one-to-one correspondence, the inputs on the main switcher.
Once a backup switcher/router has been specified, two additional new configuration tabs are displayed: Input Mapping and Output Mapping, which are used to define the input and output mappings between the designated devices.
If a backup switcher is not specified, the "Enable backup mapping" check-box is disabled (grayed out), and the additional mapping tabs are hidden (not displayed).
Enable backup mapping: Check this box to enable backup Input and Output mapping.
• If this parameter is checked, the Input Mapping and Output Mapping tabs are displayed, and enabled for entry.
• If a backup switcher is set, but "Enable backup mapping" is disabled (unchecked), the Input
Mapping and Output Mapping tab their but tables are in a disabled state. This allows the user can see what mapping is used if backup mapping is enabled.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 192
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
15. Input Mapping tab and the Output Mapping tab. When the user specifies backup switcher/router for the first time, the mapping tables are filled with default values, using one-to-one correspondence.
Default Mapping: The following default mapping is used only if the backup device is specified for the first time.
If both Main and Backup switcher/router have the same amount of inputs/outputs, the tables are filled using one-to-one correspondence between Main and Backup inputs. If Backup switcher/router has more inputs/outputs than Main, the same order is used.
Main Input (16 inputs) Backup Input (16 or more inputs)
1 1
…
16
…
16
If the Main switcher/router has more inputs/outputs than the Backup, all Main in-puts/outputs whose numbers are more than the Backup inputs/outputs amount will correspond to Backup input/output 1:
2
3
4
Main Input (6 inputs) Backup Input (4 inputs)
1 1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
Modified Mapping: If the backup switcher/router is already specified and mapping tables are filled by the user, but then the user changes backup device, already adjusted input and output mapping values are retained – as much as possible.
If the first chosen backup switcher/router has more inputs/outputs than the second, all inputs/outputs that are not in range are replaced by appropriate ones.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 193
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For Example: The user first chooses an IconMaster MC which has 16 inputs and specified mapping, then changes the backup switcher/router to a Sony Isara MC which has 12 inputs. The old input mapping is kept, but values which are not in range are replaced automatically.
Note: This example is for reference only. The configuration dialog of your selected devices may appear different than those shown in this example.
IconMaster as backup Sony Isara as backup
If the user fills mapping tables and then changes the amount of inputs/outputs on the Main switcher/router, the number of lines in the mapping tables is automatically updated and the new lines populated with default values.
For Example: The main switcher M2100 has 16 inputs, but then the user increases the number of inputs on the M2100 to 20 and presses "Apply".
Note: This example is for reference only. The configuration dialog of your selected devices may appear different than those shown in this example.
M2100 set for 16 Inputs Input tab shows 16 lines for input
M2100 changed to 20 Inputs Input tab now shows 20 lines for input
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 194
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
16. Select Audio Control tab. Use this tab to set up specific audio control commands for switchers that support this feature.
Unsupported audio options (e.g. audio channel mapping) are hidden on the "Audio Control" tab in
MCS driver configuration screens. This simplifies configuration by ensuring less confusion over supported vs. unsupported features per specific MCS make/model.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Control Audio Mode: Enable (check) to allow control of Audio Mode.
Audio Mode:
• Stereo/Mono: Enable (check) stereo / mono control for audio recording. Default is disabled
(unchecked).
If an event has either Stereo or Mono in the sSP column of the transmission list, the automation will command the switcher to use the appropriate audio mixing.
• Enhanced Audio Modes: (For MC2020) Check to enable Audio support for mono/stereo/SAP/Dolby modes.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 195
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If an event has either Mono/Stereo/SAP in the sSP column of the transmission list, the automation will command the switcher to use the appropriate audio mixing.
• Switcher Audio Crosspoint: Enable (check) for secondary audio routing.
Current number of audio outputs: Specify the number of switcher audio crosspoints (up to 16).
This parameter is enabled only if the Switcher Audio Crosspoint option is selected. Otherwise it is grayed out.
Default input for Audio: Specify the input (1-x) for Audio 1 - x. These options are enabled when
Switcher Audio Crosspoint is selected.
ADC v12: About Controlling Audio Overs: (For IconMaster) To better manage automation control of Audio Over busses, the IconMaster driver implements a subscription service that subscribes to changes and monitors device status according to received notifications.
17. Select Cascade tab. Use this tab to set up Cascade routing.
Cascading (sometimes called "chaining") allows the user to route audio and video through multiple switchers and routers simultaneously.
Example: a customer has ten VTRs, each with a designated output on their router. They have only one input on their master control switcher that must be shared among all ten VTRs. Each VTR output on the router may be cascaded to the single input on the master control switcher to switch it to air.
This particular arrangement negates the possibility of using transition effects on the master control switcher between two back-to-back VTR events – the switcher cannot transition between events on the same input.
Add button: Launches the Add Cascade Data dialog. Specify the following parameters as required, click OK, and then click Apply.
• Output Active Line: This setting specifies which of the switcher’s crosspoints the cascaded switcher is connected to. The valid range is 0 to 32768.
Note: If the "Output Active Line" number is the same as "Cascade Crosspoint Out" number, it is treated as invalid. This only occurs if the Cascade Device is the same and not if it is a different switcher/router.
• Cascade Device: Select a cascade device from the dropdown list.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 196
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Cascade Crosspoint In: The crosspoint on the cascaded switcher to which the Output Active
Line setting (above) is connected. The valid range is 0 to 32768.
• Cascade Crosspoint Out: The out crosspoint on the cascaded switcher to which the signal is to be routed. The valid range is 0 to 32768.
Edit Button: To edit an existing entry, select an entry from the cascade list display and then click
Edit. An edit dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected entry. Make changes as required, click OK, and then click Apply.
Delete button: To delete an existing entry, select an entry from the cascade list display and then click Delete.
18. Select Switching tab. Use this tab to manually switch inputs and outputs for diagnostic purposes.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 197
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
This utility is not intended as an on-line substitute for the switcher’s own control panels. The source and destination names tables must be completed before any sources or destinations will appear in the drop-down boxes.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Black, Colorbars, Station ID, Initial Input buttons: These selections refer to the sources designated on the System Inputs tab above. If a source and destination are selected in the dropdown boxes, clicking the "Switch" button will cause the switch to occur.
19. Select Timing tab. Used by devices that support Max Latency and join in progress functionality. (e.g.
IconMaster, NVision MCS.)
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 198
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Max Latency Count: (Default: 20) Specify the time in frames that a device needs to reply to a command. Adjust the "Max Latency Count" based on the number of secondary events to bring up with the primary event. (Range: 0 - 300)
Join in progress: (For IconMaster) Enable (check) the IconMaster driver option to re-join the
ADC playlist at its current schedule location after the IconMaster has reported to its serial port that Automation control has been restored from the local mode (hold button on IconMaster
Panel). (Default: disabled)
20. Manual Intervention tab. (IconMaster Only).
Configure the following parameters as required:
Do not remove manually enabled keyers: Use this option to configure handling of manually inserted and enabled keyers.
• When this option is enabled (checked), manually enabled keyers are NOT removed with the next transition.
• When this option is disabled, manually enabled keyers are removed with the next transition.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 199
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
21. Select Command tab. (for BTS Saturn Switcher and GVR Maestro) If required, enable (check) to preroll a transition.
22. Select MCS Status tab. (For Versio sub device). After a control connection has been initialized, the
Versio MCS driver regularly checks the status of the MCS device. All requested information is available upon the MCS Status tab.
23. Select MCS Status tab. (For Versio MCS) After a control connection has been initialized, the Versio
MCS driver regularly checks the status of the MCS device. All requested information is available upon the MCS Status tab.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 200
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
24. Select Diagnostics tab. (For GVG 100 and Versio MCS) If required, click the Reinitialize button to reinitialized the device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 201
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
25. Select Manual Control tab. (For Probel TX520). Use this tab to set keyer 1 thru keyer 4 to Manual or
Auto mode. For example, if Manual Control is selected for keyer1, Automation will not send any commands to turn on/ off the keyer 1.
26. Select Imagestore tab. (For Miranda MCS SubDev only).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 202
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
27. Select Transition Attributes tab. (For Pesa MCLite MCS only).
Configure the following parameters as required:
Cut Input Name: Select option from dropdown list
Hold Input Name: Select option from dropdown list
Wipe Pattern: Select option from dropdown list
Wipe Border: Select option from dropdown list
28. Select Audio Over tab. (For QMC and Oxtel Presmaster)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Uses: Choose between the # field and the sSP field to represent the Audio unit (value of 1 or 2).
Default will be the current behavior, i.e. # Field.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 203
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Audio Over number and Keyer number can be specified in ‘#’ field or the ‘sSP’ field. Up to 254 logos can be recalled.
• # field of Event: This field has a range of 0 to 9
• sSP field of Event: This field has a range of 1 through 254
29. Select Keyer Number Over tab. (For QMC)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Uses: Choose between the # field and the sSP field to represent the Keyer Number. Default will be the current behavior, i.e. # Field.
Keyer number can be specified in ‘#’ field or the ‘sSP’ field. Up to 254 logos can be recalled.
• # field of Event: This field has a range of 0 to 9
• sSP field of Event: This field has a range of 1 through 254
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 204
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
30. Select Extra Keyers tab. (For Oxtel Presmaster only).
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Fitted: This parameter defines the Intuition mode from unfitted to fitted. Default parameter is unfitted (unchecked).
The Presmaster has two downstream keyers, an optional two extra keyers (when the second
Imagestore is fitted) or an optional 8 extra keyers (when an Imagestore Intuition is fitted).
31. Select Logo Source tab. (For Oxtel Presmaster only.)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Uses: Select one of the following:
• # field of Event: (Default selection) When selected, has logo limit of 254.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 205
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Title field of Event: Select to allow the operator to use the title field to enter logo numbers up to 4000.
The format of Title filed for Logo is as follows: "L="<logoNumber> (without quotation marks and brackets)
32. Apply the changes. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
33. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Router Configuration (General)
In general, the Automation interface treats all makes and models of routers as generic devices. The specific driver for a particular brand of router will communicate using that brand’s control protocol, but this is transparent to the automation system’s user.
The following is an example router configuration. Depending on the specific brand and model of router, the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device, and there may be other configuration options not outlined here. Information regarding these options may be found in the user notes for the specific device.
• Routing under automation: The Automation system communicates with routers via the devices’ native protocol. When a switch command is sent to a router, the automation sends a "switching triplet" consisting of the device number, the input number and the output number to the software object controlling the device. This "triplet" is then translated to the router’s own command language and the command is passed via the RS-422 serial connection to the device. This translated command may also contain transition information or audio mixer and keyer presets for a master control switcher, or the number of levels to switch for a router.
To Configure a Router
1. Under Router Switchers in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 206
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
2. Select the Router device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab. Use this tab to enter a specific name for the device, specify the dimensions of the router, and compensate for any router latency.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Enter a name (using up to 16 characters) for the switcher. This name is used by the automation system to identify the switcher. Systems with multiple switchers should have each switcher assigned a unique name.
Dimensions.
• Input Crosspoints: Specify the input crosspoint on a cascaded switcher to which the device’s setting is connected. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 16.
• Output Crosspoints: Specify the output crosspoint on a cascaded switcher to which the device’s setting is connected. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 1.
Switcher Latency: This parameter adjusts the latency of the switcher. The adjustment can range from -10 to +10 frames.
• If the adjustment is positive, the switcher switches the entered number of frames later.
• If the adjustment is negative, the switcher switches the entered number of frames earlier.
The default value of zero is usually sufficient.
Adjust latency only if it has been determined that the router is indeed switching early or late.
Some routers have a built-in latency of one frame and will always switch one frame late if this latency is not compensated for.
4. Select Connection tab. (For PassThrough and Panacea C&Q routers) Use this tab to configure the driver for serial or IP control.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 207
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Serial: To configure a serial connection select the Serial radio button. The Serial Port pane is made active. Also, when this option is selected the Communications tab is displayed.
• From the Serial Port drop-down list choose a connection port. This port selected is the physical port which the device is connected to.
• When viewing the serial port cards on the back of the ADC Device Server, the upper left serial port is Port 1. The port numbers increase as you count down the ADC serial board.
The top serial port of the next serial card will be the following port number.
TCP/IP: To configure a TCP/IP connection using telnet select the TCP/IP radio button. The TCP/IP
(telnet) pane is made active.
• Host: Specify the host IP address.
• Port: Specify the communications port to use. (Default: 23)
• Telnet Login: Specify your telnet login.
• Telnet Password: Specify your telnet password.
Note: The driver opens a Telnet session into the Router. It establishes TCP connection with
Telnet port (23 by default), sends login/password, and then operates according to the same protocol as serial connection.
Note: The number of Telnet sessions that can be opened at the same time depends on the device. (For Example: Maximum 4 sessions with Platinum router. Maximum 10 sessions with
Panacea router.) The number of Telnet sessions used will reduce the total number of connections allowed for a device.
5. Select Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 208
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Set this to the physical serial port number on the Device Server where the router is connected (start from the first serial card on the left; the ports are numbered top-down). You need not use the same value as the Channel number for the Serial Port, although it may make troubleshooting easier for you in the future.
6. Select Communications tab. (For Evertz-Quartz, Miranda-Nvision, Network Proline, BTS Venus,
DiTech, and Leitch PT) Use this tab to specify Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stops Bits, and Parity.
7. Select Sources tab. Use this tab to create a table of source names (mnemonics) associated with router inputs that the automation may use for record events. The source names table accepts multiple names for the same input number, but does not accept duplicate names for different inputs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 209
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If a record event is placed on a record list, the source name may be entered in the title field. The automation compares this source name to the source names table and switches the designated input to the record device that has registered the event.
This is important if you plan on using the router in conjunction with ADC record events, which use the descriptions to identify the source on the router. Otherwise, it is not necessary to fill in this information (the Transmission List will not use this information for Playout events).
Configure the following parameters as required:
Add button: Click the Add button to enter a source crosspoint name and number.
• Crosspoint Name: The Crosspoint Name is a mnemonic to help the operator identify the crosspoint. (up to 8 characters)
• Number: The physical connection number of the crosspoint.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 210
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Edit button: To edit an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Edit. An edit dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected entry. Make changes as required, and then click OK.
Delete button: To delete an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Delete.
8. Select Destinations tab. Use this tab to create a table of destination names that the automation primarily uses for secondary crosspoint switch events. The destination names table accepts multiple names for the same output number, but does not accept duplicate names for different outputs.
If a secondary crosspoint switch event is placed on the playlist, the source and destination names may be entered in the title field using the format: source name:destination name (the colon is required). The automation compares these names to the source and destination names tables and switches the designated input to the designated output at the appropriate time.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Add button: Launches the Add Destination Data dialog. Specify the CrossPoint Name, Number, and then click OK
• Crosspoint Name: The Crosspoint Name is a mnemonic to help the operator identify the crosspoint.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 211
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Number: The physical connection number of the crosspoint.
Edit Button: To edit an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Edit. An edit dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected entry. Make changes as required, and then click OK.
Delete button: To delete an existing entry, select an entry from the crosspoint list display and then click Delete.
9. Select System Inputs tab. Use this tab to specify the router or switcher inputs for common sources such as Black, Colorbars, Station ID, and Initial Input.
All four inputs designated here may be switched manually from the diagnostic switch panel (see
Switching Tab below). In addition, the Black and Station ID inputs are used by the automation if the corresponding list settings, Switch to Black and Station ID on Skip, are enabled on the List
Configuration / Properties / Options tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 212
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
System Inputs: For each entry specify a number from 0 to 32768 to indicate which crosspoints carry the black, colorbars, station ID and initial input signals. Default is 0. These options are not used by the automation system unless the corresponding list settings are enabled for Black
Input and StationID.
• Black Input: When the Transmission List Option "Switch to Black" is selected, and the most recent event on the list was running on a device configured to use this router, then the crosspoint listed here (if non-zero) will be switched to the output crosspoint used by that event: o
If the list stops because of an error, o
If the event ends and there is a Hard-Start delay until the next event begins, or o
If it ends normally and there are no more events on the list. o
If it is set to 0 then nothing will happen.
• Colorbars: This crosspoint is used only when the Colorbars button is pressed on the diagnostics control panel (Configuration Utility or Air Client). If it is set to 0 then the
Colorbars button will have no action.
• Station ID: When the Transmission List Option "Station ID on Skip" is selected, and the most recent event on the list was running on a device configured to use this router, then this crosspoint will be switched to the output crosspoint used by that event if an operator invokes Skip on the Air Client’s control panel. When the next event begins to play, the crosspoint is switched to whatever that event requires.
• Initial Input: This crosspoint will be switched to all outputs of the router when the Device
Server application is launched. If it is set to 0 then nothing will happen. In most cases it is recommended to leave this function disabled (0).
Note: During initialization of the router driver, all destinations are set to the source entered in the "Initial Input".
About Initial Input: The Initial Input source comes into play when communication is first established with the switcher or in the event of a switcher failure.
• If the router fails to switch for some reason – the router returns a NAK (i.e. a Negative
Acknowledgment because the command format is wrong) or no response to a switch command – the automation retries the switch command twice.
• If the router fails to switch after two retries, the automation attempts to reinitialize the router. It sends a command to switch to the designated Initial Input. In most cases, particularly if there are intermittent serial communication problems with the router, it may be safer to leave the Initial Input set to zero. That way, the automation will not attempt to reinitialize the router and possibly switch to black (or whatever has been designated as the
Initial Input).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 213
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
10. Select Effect Durations tab. (For Panacea Clean Quiet) Use this tab to select duration of transitions in frames for Slow, Medium and Fast duration transitions.
11. Select Reporting tab. Use this tab to enable reporting of the condition of the switcher or router to the error log.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Enable reporting for: There are three available options on the Reporting tab, depending on the amount of information that is necessary to be logged into the ADC error file when the router is used. The actual log is configured on the Air Client application, but the information supplied to the logging mechanism from the router driver is regulated here.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 214
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
These parameters allow the switcher to generate an error whenever the switcher does not respond to a communication request. Place a check mark in each box to enable reporting
(default is disabled for all).
• Errors: Enables the logging of critical failures, such as the device failing to confirm that a transition command was executed, or when communication is lost with the router.
• Warnings: Enables the logging of other information reported by the router. The 1200 series routers do not provide such information to automation; so enabling Warnings will have no effect on the system.
• Crosspoint Changes: Enables the logging of each transition with a timestamp from when it occurred.
IMPORTANT: Normally these are left disabled, but can be enabled for diagnostic purposes. If reporting for Crosspoint Changes is enabled, the error log will quickly fill up with every crosspoint switch command the automation has sent to the router.
12. Select Log tab. Use this tab to configure manual intervention logging parameters.
Configure the following parameters as required:
AsRun Log: This group enables As Run Logging of Manual Actions on Program, Keyer and Audio
Over Bus with the help of 3 check boxes: Select the type of bus to log: Program Bus, Keyer Bus,
Audio Over Bus.
Program Bus: When selected enables the manual change in PGM bus to be reported as an error or as a warning.
Keyer Bus: When selected enables the manual change in KEY bus to be reported as an error or as a warning.
Audio Over Bus: When selected enables the manual change in AUDIO OVER bus to be reported as an error or as a warning.
Contextual Error Message: Check to enable two additional error messages:
• "Manual Intervention of System"
• "Return to Automated Control of System"
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 215
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
13. Select Backup tab. Use this tab to designate another router as the backup to the main router in case of a failure. The router that is configured here will receive all of the transition commands that are sent to the main device. For this reason the Backup router must be wired identically to the Main.
There are other methods for driving a second switcher if this limitation cannot be accommodated.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Backup Switcher: Select from the dropdown list of available backup switchers. Use this parameter when installing a redundant switcher to act as backup if the main switcher fails. In the Configure Backup Switcher window, enter the number of the port that has the backup switcher connected to it (i.e., the device server channel number).
The main and backup switchers do not need to be the same model, but the backup should have dimensions large enough to back up all of the main switcher’s crosspoints. Both switchers must receive the same inputs. During playout, the backup switcher switches whenever the main switcher switches
The default is None (no backup switcher configured).
IMPORTANT: The backup router is switched simultaneously with the main router. The inputs on the backup router must match, in a one-to-one correspondence, the inputs on the main router.
Once a backup switcher/router has been specified, two additional new configuration tabs are displayed: Input Mapping and Output Mapping, which are used to define the input and output mappings between the designated devices.
If a backup switcher is not specified, the "Enable backup mapping" check-box is disabled (grayed out), and the additional mapping tabs are hidden (not displayed).
Enable backup mapping: Check this box to enable backup Input and Output mapping.
• If this parameter is checked, the Input Mapping and Output Mapping tabs are displayed, and enabled for entry.
• If a backup switcher is set, but "Enable backup mapping" is disabled (unchecked), the Input
Mapping and Output Mapping tab their but tables are in a disabled state. This allows the user can see what mapping is used if backup mapping is enabled.
14. Input Mapping tab and the Output Mapping tab. When the user specifies backup switcher/router for the first time, the mapping tables are filled with default values, using one-to-one correspondence.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 216
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Default Mapping: The following default mapping is used only if the backup device is specified for the first time.
If both Main and Backup switcher/router have the same amount of inputs/outputs, the tables are filled using one-to-one correspondence between Main and Backup inputs. If Backup switcher/router has more inputs/outputs than Main, the same order is used.
Main Input (16 inputs) Backup Input (16 or more inputs)
1
…
1
…
16 16
If the Main switcher/router has more inputs/outputs than the Backup, all Main in-puts/outputs whose numbers are more than the Backup inputs/outputs amount will correspond to Backup input/output 1:
2
3
Main Input (6 inputs) Backup Input (4 inputs)
1 1
2
3
4
5
6
4
1
1
Modified Mapping: If the backup switcher/router is already specified and mapping tables are filled by the user, but then the user changes backup device, already adjusted input and output mapping values are retained – as much as possible.
If the first chosen backup switcher/router has more inputs/outputs than the second, all inputs/outputs that are not in range are replaced by appropriate ones.
For Example: The user first chooses an Evertz router which has 128 inputs and specified mapping, then changes the backup switcher/router to an IconMaster which has 16 inputs. The old input mapping is kept, but values which are not in range are replaced automatically.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 217
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: This example is for reference only. The configuration dialog of your selected devices may appear different than those shown in this example.
Evertz as backup IconMaster as backup
If the user fills mapping tables and then changes the amount of inputs/outputs on the Main switcher/router, the number of lines in the mapping tables is automatically updated and the new lines populated with default values.
For Example: The main switcher Maestro has 6 inputs, but then the user increases the number of inputs on the Maestro to 12 and presses "Apply".
Note: This example is for reference only. The configuration dialog of your selected devices may appear different than those shown in this example.
Maestro set for 6 Inputs Input tab shows 6 lines for input
Maestro changed to 12 Inputs Input tab now shows 12 lines for input
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 218
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
15. Select Cascade tab. Use this tab to set up Cascade routing.
Cascading (sometimes called "chaining") allows the user to route audio and video through multiple routers and switchers simultaneously.
Example: a customer has ten VTRs, each with a designated output on their router. They have only one input on their master control switcher that must be shared among all ten VTRs. Each
VTR output on the router may be cascaded to the single input on the master control switcher to switch it to air. This particular arrangement negates the possibility of using transition effects on the master control switcher between two back-to-back VTR events – the switcher cannot transition between events on the same input.
Recursive Cascading allows Router sources to be cascaded back into the same router for special purposes.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 219
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Example: a customer wishes to route certain analog sources through an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) before routing them to a digital record device. The router output for the analog device may be recursively cascaded back into the router input for ADC. The output of ADC may then be routed to the digital record device.
Click the Add button to enter new cascade data for the switcher OR click the Edit button to modify cascade data selected on the Cascade tab:
Configure the following parameters as required, and then click OK.
• Output Active Line: This setting specifies which of the switcher’s crosspoints the cascaded switcher is connected to. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 0.
Note: If the "Output Active Line" number is the same as "Cascade Crosspoint Out" number, it is treated as invalid. This only occurs if the Cascade Device is the same and not if it is a different switcher/router.
• Cascade Device: Select a cascade device from the dropdown list.
• Cascade Crosspoint In: The crosspoint on the cascaded switcher to which the Output Active
Line setting (above) is connected. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 0.
• Cascade Crosspoint Out: The out crosspoint on the cascaded switcher to which the signal is to be routed. The valid range is 0 to 32768. Default is 0.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 220
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Click the Delete button to remove cascade data selected on the Cascade tab.
16. Select Switching tab. Use this tab to manually switch inputs and outputs for diagnostic purposes.
This utility is not intended as an on-line substitute for the switcher’s own control panels. The source and destination names tables must be completed before any sources or destinations will appear in the drop-down boxes.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Black, Colorbars, Station ID, Initial Input buttons: These selections refer to the sources designated on the System Inputs tab above. If a source and destination are selected in the dropdown boxes, clicking the "Switch" button will cause the switch to occur.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 221
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
17. Select Address tab. (For Sony DVS and Sony Router). Specify the address (level) of the Sony DVS switcher you want to control.
Configure the following parameter as required:
Sony Address: This is the hex address (level) of the Sony DVS switcher you want to control.
• Routing switchers are connected using multidrop connections, UA1 (31h fixed) and UA2 must be set for each model as their own addresses. UA2 is specified using this Select
Address tab.
When the host CPU controls switchers, the corresponding bit of the switcher to be controlled is set to '1' and the command is transmitted.
If more than one of UA2's bits are on, the command is executed, but no response is returned. However, Negative Acknowledgement (NAK) is returned if NAK (i.e. a Negative
Acknowledgment because the command format is wrong) conditions exist.
(For Sony Router 16x16, 32x32 and 256x256, and for Sony 4096 router.) By default all levels are disabled and the level switching is done based on the value entered in "Address" tab.
Note: If any levels are enabled in the "Levels" tab, then the "Address" tab is ignored.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 222
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
18. Select Cart Machine tab. (For LMS Router)
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Cart Machine: Select the cart machine.
Monitor Enabled: Check to enable switcher monitoring
19. Select Diagnostics tab. If required, click the Reinitialize button to reinitialize the device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 223
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
20. Select "Device Specific" Channel tab. (For M2100 and Icon Master Aux Routers). Use this tab to specify the Auxiliary device.
About the IconMaster Aux Router:
ADCv12 supports Aux Bus control on the IconMaster. The AxBus can be switched manually through the switch panel and through automation.
IMPORTANT: The AuxBus driver must be requested and added to your Device Server build prior to use.
21. Select Levels tab. Use this tab to specify how many levels to switch on a multi-level router.
The options available on this tab depend on the device selected. The following example tabs are from the Sony 256 (left), Datatek (right), Pesa (lower left) and NVision Router (lower right).
Note: These are global settings for all inputs and outputs on the router. The automation does not have the ability to do input-specific level switching, i.e. the automation cannot be configured to specify that one input should only switch levels 1, 2, 3 and another input should switch levels 1 through 8. The "Levels to Switch" parameter applies to all inputs on the router.
Note: Other routers may not have this tab available in the configuration sheet. The "Levels to
Switch" may be configured in the router itself allowing more flexibility in level switching. Refer to the user notes for the specific device and to the vendor’s documentation for more information.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 224
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required,
Number of Levels: Specify the number of video and audio router levels.
For Example: The System 3 router itself has internal association tables. There is an association table for source and one for destination. These internal association tables allow the System 3 to be set up such that the audio and video can be different for a given table entry. To use the association feature on the list, set the value of "levels" in level tab of device configuration to 0.
Router Levels: Select the number of router levels.
• (For Sony Router 16x16, 32x32 and 256x256, and for Sony 4096 router.) This tab is used to support multiple levels for the SONY Router (S-BUS protocol) 256x256 driver. If any of the levels are enabled in the "Levels" tab, then the "Address" tab is ignored.
For NVision and Panacea Clean Quiet Routers:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 225
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Add button: When selected launches an 'Add Cascade Data' dialog. On this dialog specify
Level name, Level number, and select Video, Audio, and/or AFV. When finished click OK.
• Edit button: To edit an entry, select an existing entry from the display list and then click Edit.
A populated Cascade Data dialog is launched. Make any required changes then click OK.
• Delete button: To delete an entry, select an existing entry from the display list and then click
Delete.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 226
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
22. Select Wire tab. (For GVG 10XL and Evertz 1200) Use this tab to configure the driver to operate in
Simplex or Full Duplex mode.
Configure the following parameters as required:
2 Wires: If selected, the driver will ignore any input from the device and never report any comm. errors. If RS-485 operation is attempted with multiple routers (not recommended), this option must be used and the return lines from the switcher must be disconnected. The Device Server hardware is not capable of negotiation on an RS-485 bus.
4 Wires: If selected, the driver will look for confirmation from the router that a transition has occurred, and retry (twice) if there is no reply. If there is still no reply after three tries, the driver will stop trying and report an error (if Warnings is selected on the Reporting tab). This is the recommended mode of operation, but only one router can be connected to the driver.
23. Select Salvo tab. (For Probel System 2L & 3L, and DiTech) Use this tab to enable salvo switching.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 227
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If a Switcher/Router is not assigned to any list, then it is used as a share by all the lists. This is important for routers because some of them support salvo switching as the router does not use preroll time and effects while switching, so it can do some switches during one frame. Routers which do not support this function can only do sequenced switching.
24. Select Matrix tab. (Available for Probel System 3L) Use this tab to specify the Matrix Address.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 228
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
25. Select Video/Audio Address tab. (For Miranda HD 1616D Router). Use this tab to select video/audio addresses (0 to 15) of individual frames to be switched.
26. Select Protocol tab. (Available for BTS Venus)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Protocol: Select ASCII or ESSwitch protocol
Crosspoint base: Specify is the protocol is Zero-based or One-based.
Add CR/LF: Check to enable adding of a carriage return / line feed.
27. Select Leitch tab. (For Leitch PT Router, Panacea Clean Quiet Router). Use this tab to specify the ID of the device and the specify use of salvo switching.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 229
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If a Switcher/Router is not assigned to any list then it is used as a shared by all the lists. This is important for routers because some of them support salvo switching as the router does not use preroll time and effects while switching, so it can do some switches during one frame. Routers which do not support this function can only do sequenced switching.
28. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
29. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Switch Only Configuration (General)
The Switch Only device parameters configure the ADC Device Server to switch to a switcher crosspoint and/or trigger a GPI (general purpose interface) contact closure. GPI is an option to the standard ADC
Device Server system (requires a GPI board to be installed in the Device Server).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 230
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
About Switch Only Device
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Switch Only devices are used to:
• Incorporate material from external sources, such as network and satellite feeds, cameras and presenters;
• Trigger events involving devices not supported by RS422 or RS232 protocols, through a GPI (general purpose interface).
A Switch Only event inserted in a list can be set up to switch a crosspoint, count down a predetermined amount of time and roll the next event. By entering Auto Upcount for the event associated with a Switch
Only device, the event counts down to zero and then holds the list while counting up. A live feed can be switched away from by issuing a Play or Skip command to the transmission list. This is done manually, through the control panel.
When a primary event in a list has an ID that matches the ID of the Switch Only device, the event and device become associated (if the Switch Only device is assigned to the list). The event goes through the transmission process like other types of events. The event (and device) goes through preroll, switches at the end of preroll, counts down a duration, rolls the next event and then goes through postroll. You can also Skip the event and roll the next event.
A Switch Only device can be used as a secondary event which is bound to another event. A secondary event can close a GPI relay at a designated time before or after the primary event goes to air. The duration of the closure can be controlled directly by the event. The event can also be used to tag a primary event with a video overlay (such as a station bug) or generate a tone at some predetermined time before entering a commercial break or returning to program material. This type of usage requires an external device that is controlled by a GPI closure. Many such devices are available on the open market.
There are two types of secondary GPI events that can be put on a list to control physical contact closure
– GPI Contact or Back-Timed GPI. The type of GPI you use depends on the timing of the secondary event.
GPI Contact runs a contact after the primary event runs.
Back-Timed GPI runs a contact before the primary event runs. Both GPI events are associated with a Switch Only device whose ID matches the ID of the secondary event.
Switch Only events with the same ID may be played back to back as primary events. There are no restrictions as long as these events are both primary events. Since Switch Only events have no SOM, these events are always contiguous and will always play back to back.
When it is necessary for two switch only events of the same ID to be played consecutively in a transmission list, it is necessary to have two of them configured within the same group of 8 and for both to be assigned to the same transmission list.
About Switch Only (missing) Configuration
Although List Redundancy is not required when using missing Switch Only’s, missing Switch Only’s only work for the number of lists set in the UserCons.Inc parameter: maxRedSeqLists = ‘n’. Where ‘n’ is the number of transmission list that can be redundant. This parameter setting is in addition to the standard
Switch Only (missing) parameters configured through the Configuration Tool.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 231
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
About Extended Switch Only Device
The vast majority of Switch Onlys are used to define sources. The number of Switch Onlys that have to be defined, particularly in large channel count systems, can require a huge number of switch only objects.
To address this ADC v12.19 introduced the Extended Switch Only device driver. This driver has all of the same functions and configurations as the existing Switch Only driver with the extended capability of specifying up to 20 individual heads.
To Configure a Switch Only Device
1. Under Switch Onlys in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Switch Only / Extended Switch Only device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Enter a name (using up to 16 characters) for the switcher. This name is used by the automation system to identify the switcher. Systems with multiple switchers should have each switcher assigned unique name.
Heads Amount: (for Extended Switch Only) Use the spin arrows to specify the number of heads as any value from 1 to 20.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 232
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Switch Only 1-8: Assign unique names for each Switch Only.
Switch Only 1-20: (for Extended Switch Only) Assign unique names for each Switch Only. Use the scroll bar to scroll up and down to view all designated Switch Onlys.
4. Select Prerolls/Postrolls tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Use Instant Prerolls: Enable (check) to provide instant play/skip capability to the device. It allows the device to have its own short preroll for manual intervention in the list. The feature is designed for coming out of a live or upcounting event as fast as possible when the next event has a near-instant preroll. When using a master control switcher, the preroll must not be shorter than the shortest preroll supported by the switcher.
Seconds / Frames: When Use Instant Prerolls is enabled, values for preroll seconds and frames must be entered. The preroll value must be at least 4 frames. These values do not have any effect if the Use Instant Prerolls box is left unchecked.
Switch Only: Select a Switch Only device configured in the previous tab. The settings chosen in the Prerolls/Postrolls tab must be repeated for each Switch Only device. Default is disabled for each device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 233
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
5. Select GPI Sheet tab.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
GPI Card.
• No Card: No GPI Card is connected to the device activated by this event
• Card One – Four: Indicates which GPI card is connected to the device activated by this event.
Contact Number.
• Bit 1 – 8: Specifies the contact number (i.e., relay number) on the GPI card to which the external device is connected. The contacts are numbered 0 to 7 by the GPI board and 1 to 8 by the ADC Device Server.
• Add 1 to the GPI board number when the contact number is entered. For example, a device wired to pins 2 (COM 2) on the board should be entered as having Contact number 3
Pulse Width: Specifies the duration of the GPI contact, in frames (i.e., the length of time the contacts are closed), for primary GPI events. The GPI contact closes when the event goes into preroll.
For secondary events, the contact duration is specified by the event itself.
Pulse Offset: Specifies the contact closure offset (in frames) for the primary/secondary event associated with a Switch Only device. The contact can be closed at any time during preroll.
• When the value is set to zero, the contact closure is closed, starting at preroll, for the duration specified for Pulse Width.
• When the value is greater than zero, the contact is closed when the number of frames remaining in preroll reaches this value.
The Pulse Offset value is backtimed from the end of preroll, not from the beginning of preroll.
The value must not be larger than the preroll used by the list the Switch Only device is attached to, or the instant preroll, if configured.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 234
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Switch Only: Select a Switch Only device. The settings chosen in the GPI tab must be repeated for each Switch Only device. Default is disabled for each device.
6. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
7. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Requestor Configuration (General)
The following is an example requester configuration. Your requester may have slightly different configuration options. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
About Requestors
A requester is a software object assigned to a transmission list that forwards the ID of a missing media event to distributors. The distributor responds to the requester and, if the distributor’s source device contains the missing media, forwards the ID to the GMT list. The GMT list moves the media to the destination device specified in the requester. A requester can request media based on a push model (for preloading of media) or a pull model (for a static or running playlist).
Most system configurations only require one requester per transmission list; however, additional requesters may be added to segregate the types of material, such as commercials and programs that will be requested from distributors.
Systems using air and protect devices require an additional requester per transmission list; one for each device.
About the Content Handler Requestor
The Content Handler requester is in charge of triggering and monitoring Content Handling process execution when IDs are missing within the ADC transmission lists.
Typically, the main purpose of the Content Handler requester is "media retrieval to playout devices".
However, there is no specific limitation of the triggered processes (this could be something different than "media retrieval").
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 235
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
The Content Handler Requestor can provide:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• On-Air time export to Intelligent Media Manager (IMM).
• If Cloning, Content Handler Requester will not requesting missing events
• If required the system can be configured to "Abort Un-registered Events"!
To Configure a Requestor
1. Under Requestors in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Requestor device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab. This is where the name is set. This tab also determines if the Requester will automatically resend the request if the Distributor cannot fulfill it the first time. It also is where the parameters are set if this Requester is to be used on a Push List.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The name of the requester. This name should be descriptive enough so you know what it is used for. The default is REQSTxx where xx is the position of the requester within the server’s device list. This position is also known as the channel number. You may change the device name to any name you wish. There is a 16 character maximum.
Request Sending Interval (Frame): (Default 100 frames) Specify the request sending interval in frames.
Usually, GMT system needs more than one minute to transfer one clip, but when loading a new play list, it may generate thousands of missing events and all these missing events will come to
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 236
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager the requestor. This sudden influx of events may cause a traffic jam on the network layer, and affect server operations.
• Request Sending Interval (Frame)’s default value is 100 frames.
• For general usage, usually 1 frame is OK.
• If GMT needs to transfer hundreds even thousands event daily, the GMT flow control needs to be considered. Usually, 30 frames is a recommend value in a GMT system without baseband.
• In baseband GMT system with Air-Protect feature, because the GMT needs to combine both
Air and Protect disk’s recording, the value of Request Sending Interval (Frame) should not exceed 5 frames.
Auto-Retry Missing Media. Used to automatically send a re-request for missing ID’s.
• Retry Interval (Mins): Select (check) to enable the auto-retry function.
Retry frequency: Specify the retry interval in minutes. (Default: 5) The retry frequency is how often in minutes a request will be sent to look for missing material.
• Maximum Retry Times: Specify the maximum number if times to retry for missing media.
(Default: 10) This is the maximum number of retries within the given allotted time.
• It is important to note that once an event is in the auto-retry mode; the only way to manually stop the retry is to delete the request from the transmission list.
CAUTION: Once an event is in the auto-retry mode; the only way to manually stop the retry is to delete the request from the transmission list, and then reinitialize the requester.
Push Requester Parameters. This section is used when this Requester is being used for a Push
List.
• Play Events: Off-air simulated (or "faked") playing of the moved event. Used for generating an As-run log entry.
• Register Events When Moved: The requester not only removes the "REQUESTED" status, but causes the list to turn the event BLUE after the operation. This provides an indicator to the operator.
If both "Register Events When Moved" and "Play Events" are enabled AND you have used an available GMT list to load the push list into (as opposed to a standard transmission list) then not only will each event turn BLUE, it will be marked PLAY and then DONE (each event is run in a
"fake" manner so that a DONE status appears and the event is as-run logged).
For Push Lists, if both ‘Register Events When Moved’ and ‘Play Events’ are enabled, ensure option "Release Tension When Cued" in the List Properties >Options tab is unchecked (the default is checked).
4. Select Qualifiers tab. Use this tab to specify the qualifications that this requester uses to determine if it should make requests for media. These parameters would be used if more than one video server was assigned to a transmission list and each server has specific material ID’s in it. These parameters can also be used to optimize performance.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 237
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Specify events with or without segments, events that run less than a specific duration, and qualify events based upon the range of the ID. Usually you will need to set the request qualifiers if you have multiple requesters on a transmission list, and these requesters are requesting media from different sources.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Program – Spots. Configure this Requester to request only Programs or only Spots.
• No Events With Segments: To be recorded, events cannot have segments. If enabled
(checked), Multi-segment IDs cannot be requested. Default is disabled.
• Events With Segments Only: Events must have segments in order to be recorded. If enabled
(checked), single spots will not be requested. Default is disabled.
Note: If both of the above boxes are left at their default settings (both disabled), you can request all material: both single spot IDs and multi segment IDs.
Duration Range: Restrict the length of clip to be requested by this particular Requester. The time parameters are only active if the associated box is checked.
• No Events Greater Than (Mins): Click to enable, and then specify a maximum number of minutes allowed for an event. Default is 5 minutes.
• No Events Less Than (Mins): Click to enable, and then specify a minimum number of minutes allowed for an event. Default is 0 minutes.
ID Range.
This qualifier is useful where some IDs are to be requested and others not, and the Duration qualifier cannot distinguish between them.
• Only Events with ID in: Check to enable qualification. If the ID qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only request IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
• Only Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field. If this qualifier is enabled, then the disk will only request IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 238
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For example: If only IDs starting with a ’9’ are to be requested , enter a ’9’ in both boxes. To request only IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• No Event with ID Between: Check to enable. Then specify range in the associated number field. If this qualifier is enabled, then the disk will ignore IDs whose first character is between or equal to the ’--to--‘ limits.
For example: To ignore and not request IDs whose first character of the ID is from ’0’ to ’5’ inclusive, place ’0’ and ’5’ in the two parameters.
• from-- to --: Alphanumeric entry. Specify range. Up to 32 characters can be entered in each field.
’A’ to ’Z’ and ’a’ to ’z’ are permitted, and uppercase letters are sorted before lower case letters, and uppercase letters are sorted after numbers.
5. Select the Priority tab. This tab allows the Requester to send the Distributor a priority of each item it requests. This parameter should be used to indicate how the Distributor should treat each request when it is time to transfer it.
Configure the following parameters as required.
Weighting: Use this parameter to tell the requester to weight, by time, all requests. This
Weighting value is used to prioritize requests made by this Requester. The Weighting value is a time value that is added to the time in the GMT List event’s "Time" column. The requester adds this time to an event’s projected on-air time and the result is the time that the media is expected to be needed. Weighting allows some level of prioritization of requests from different requesters on the same or different transmission lists.
Note: Events with a weighted time stamp are processed after events without a weighting value added.
To prioritize the transfer sequence of requesting events on the GMT List:
• Delay the less urgent event transfer priority by adding a "fixed Time weight", such as 6 hours
(06:00:00:00") to each event associated with a Requester.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 239
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• For time critical requesting events, such as one from a on-air playlist, add a "zero weight" to its process time.
In this way, less urgent events will yield their process priority to the critical one.
Note: Normally, a Requester associated with a push list to prepare media for tomorrow's playlist will have a weight added to all requesting events, so that they will not take over the GMT resource for On-air playlist missing events.
Transfer Priority based on: Set the transfer priority.
• On-Air Time: The GMT event transfer sequence for this particular Requester is based on its
On-Air time. When this parameter is selected, the earlier On-Air time is scheduled to transfer first. The Requester—and by association the Distributor—use the time of day in the time field to determine what items are needed first. An item inserted into a transmission list is slotted into the list of things to be transferred based on its On-Air time relative to those items already set to transfer. This slotting is evident to the user on the GMT List.
• First-in-First Serve: The GMT event transfer sequence for this particular Requester is based on the sequence received by this Requester. When this parameter is selected, the requester timestamps the current time on the event for GMT to prioritize the schedule transfer. Items are transferred in the order the requests were received and, secondarily, what order the
Distributor determines it can fulfill the request. If an item is added to the transmission list, then it will go to the bottom of the priority list no matter when it is scheduled to air.
6. Select Routing tab. (For Requesters and Multi-requesters) This tab allows the Requester to be set to do certain types of transfers. Although all Modes can be selected, some of the types should not be used together on one Requester. Some modes, when used together indicate using a double-hop or multi-hop GMT.
Configure the following parameters as required. A single or any combination of routing modes can be specified.
Baseband: Real time video signal (either analog or digital). Baseband includes SDI and SPIT modes. Default is enabled. This is used for real-time copies from tape to video server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 240
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Fibre: JPEG or MPEG compressed data files. Fibre mode is typically used when both the source and destination devices are video disks. Fibre transfers are typically non-realtime. Default is disabled. A Fibre transfer will be selected when a Fibre channel or Fibre Hub is used to move material from one device (typically a video disk) to another.
Wan: Wide Area Network. This routing mode implies the transfer protocol will be FTP. Source and Destination FTP server can be geometrically separate apart. This type of transfer is used specifically for Wide Area Network GMT.
Archive: Usually there is a SCSI connection between the archive system and the video disk server. This mode is used when transferring material to and from a digital archive device source
(e.g., a StorageTek or Ampex DST) under control of an Archive Manager (e.g. Avalon, PetaServe,
DIVA or Flashnet/SGL). Default is disabled.
• Push-to-Archive: Check to enable push media to archive storage operation, (Activates Take
"group-ID" from "ReconcileK" option. See below.) The Push-to-Archive is used in conjunction with the Archive type move when an Archive Push List is being implemented.
SOM is required for Baseband: Sometimes, when a media is still ingesting, its metadata is not entered into the ADC database, but a playlist event to use this media is entered into a playlist. In this scenario, if the playout server does not have the ID, a baseband GMT that is requested and scheduled will result in a failed transfer.
This parameter determines whether Baseband GMT moves will take place if there is no database record.
Enable (check) this option to prevent this kind of event to transfer prematurely. This ensures a transfer will not start without metadata "SOM" entered into the event either manually or automatically from the ADC Database. The most typical way to get an SOM is to create a database record.
Note: This should be checked if your Baseband source device is a Cart Machine or a VTR.
Take "group-ID" from "ReconcileK": Check to enable. (This option is active when Push-to-
Archive is selected.) VDCP protocol allows Archive Manager to organize its storage into
"Groups", such as "Spot" group, "Program" Group, etc… This "Group" name can also be specified in the "Archive Device--General Tab" UI.
For a ‘push media to archive storage operation’, the user may allow specification of a "Group" name for each event different than the one specified in "Archive Device-- General Tab" UI, or different from event to event.
Enable (check) this option to specify the archive "Group" name in the "Reconcile Key" field.
When this option is enabled, by the time each push event reaches the Archive Device to push to archive, the "Group" name that comes with event determines with which Group in the archive it is categorized.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 241
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
7. Select Destination tab. (for Requestor) Use this tab to specify where the Requester sends the material (i.e. the destination device that receives the requested material). This device should be a record port of a video disk server. Other devices are not supported in this release.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Server: This is the server name that the destination device is physically connected to/resides on.
Choose the correct server from the dropdown menu.
Device: Choose the device name associated with the destination device from the dropdown menu. These are configured devices available on the previously specified Device Server.
Fibre Handle: This is the unique fibre address assigned to the destination video disk. Each video disk on a fibre network must have a unique address. Valid entries are 0 through 99.
Note: By using the up/down buttons, values over 99 can be entered.
The Fibre handle is ONLY set if this Requester is set to use Fibre or Archive routing in the previous tab. The Fibre handle should be the handle of the Destination device.
FTP Handle: FTP Handle is used only for WAN GMT. For a ProxyFTP device to log into a FTP server, a set of login parameters must be correctly specified. Parameters such as: IP-address,
Port-Number (normally set to 21 for FTP), User-Name, Password, login-Directory, etc… are often required parameters.
When configuring an ADC ProxyFTP device to transfer media from a source to a destination, each FTP server is also assigned a unique FTP-Handle. This FTP Handle is a two-digit integer automatically assigned to a FTP server as a "Site #". This FTP-Handle is often referenced as a parameter in the Requester and Distributor to address an FTP server, either for source, or for the destination of an FTP transfer.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 242
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
8. Select Distribution tab. (For Requesters and Multi-requesters) Use this tab to specify which GMT
Distributor that this requester communicates with to acquire material (i.e. the Distributor that will be asked to fulfill the requests). The chosen distributor may reside on the same device server as the requester, or may be on a different device server. This setting should point to the Distributor that should be queried first.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Server: Choose the Device Server from the dropdown menu where the distributor object identified in the Device field (below) resides.
Device: Choose the name of the distributor from the dropdown list that requests the distributor representing the primary source of material from this requester. These are the Distributor objects configured on the Device Server specified above.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 243
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
9. Select MultiDestination tab. (for MutiRequestor) A normal Requestor can only request missing media for a single destination disk. A Multi-requestor can simultaneously request missing media for all specified destination disks. Use this tab to specify the destination devices (the devices that receive the requested material). These devices should be a record port of a video disk server. Other devices are not supported in this release.
Up to 16 destinations can be specified in a single Multi-Requestor configuration. Each destination for found missing media to transfer in is specified as:
• Server: This is the ADC server name.
• Device: This is the VFS port name
• Handle: This is the Fiber Handle number of the destination VFS.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 244
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
To add a destination, click the Add button.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
• Server: This is the server name that the destination device is physically connected to.
Choose the correct server from the dropdown menu.
• Device: Choose the device name associated with the destination device from the dropdown menu.
• Fibre Handle: This is the unique fibre address assigned to the destination video disk. Each video disk on a fibre network must have a unique address. Valid entries are 0 through 99.
Note: By using the up/down buttons, values over 99 can be entered. o
If a non-zero value is entered into the Media Client for the Fibre Handle parameter on the Single Spot/ MultiSpot/Multi Seg configuration Archive tab, it will override the Fibre handle specified in the Device Server configuration for the Distributor and all ‘Send To
Archive’ and ‘Get From Archive’ operations will use this new handle. o
If the Fibre Handle value is set to 0 on the Media Client for the Fibre Handle parameter on the Single Spot/ MultiSpot/Multi Seg configuration Archive tab, the Fibre Handle value set in the Distributor configuration is used.
• FTP Handle: For a ProxyFTP device to log into a FTP server, a set of login parameters must be correctly specified. Parameters such as: IP-address, Port-Number (normally set to 21 for
FTP), User-Name, Password, login-Directory, etc… are often required parameters.
When configuring an ADC ProxyFTP device to transfer media from a source to a destination, each FTP server is also assigned a unique FTP-Handle. This FTP Handle is a two-digit integer automatically assigned to a FTP server as a "Site #". This FTP-Handle is often referenced as a parameter in the Requester and Distributor to address an FTP server, either for source, or for the destination of an FTP transfer.
• When finished click OK.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 245
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
10. Select the Diagnostics tab. Use this tab to view the retry status for the events.
The following parameters can be reviewed:
Total ID Requested: This is the total number of ids that has been requested.
Retry Waiting ID Counter: This is the number of ID’s waiting in the buffer for the next retry.
Retry ID Counter: This is the number of IDs currently being handled by Distributors--based on a
Retry--whose status has not been returned by the Distributor.
1st Time Requested ID Counter: This is the number of ID’s currently being handled by
Distributors—for the first time—whose status has not been returned by the Distributor.
Update button: Click to manually update the values in the field listed above at that particular instance. However the values are updated automatically, whenever a value has changed in one of the fields.
Reinitialize button: Click to l reset all outstanding requests to zero.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 246
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
11. Select the Content Handler tab. (Used for Content Handler Requester only).
This tab dialog is comprised of the following:
Content Handler: This parameter displays the assigned number of the Content Handler.
Devices pane: This box lists all Content Handler published processes. When a Content Handler requester device is assigned to a transmission list, missing IDs initiate the execution of the processes that have been selected in the Devices pane. Content Handler requester is in charge of the processes triggering and monitoring until all of them terminate within the Content
Handler engine.
Note: A single process selection is commonly configured.
Options pane: This box lists all the parameters that must be passed to Content Handler engine when triggering processes. The expected parameters depend on the process design itself: this is a customer oriented configuration. Some parameters can be dynamically filled in by the Content
Handler requester driver taking into account the information of the missing events.
The following list of dynamic values are currently supported:
• %EVENT_SOM%: If an option has this value, then the value is dynamically replaced with the
Start Of Message information (timecode format) of the missing event.
• %EVENT_DUR%: If an option has this value, then the value is dynamically replaced with the
Duration information (timecode format) of the missing event.
• %EVENT_OAT%: If an option has this value, then the value is dynamically replaced with the
On Air Time information (timecode format) of the missing event.
• %EVENT_RTA%: If an option has this value, then the value is dynamically replaced with the
Remaining Time to Air information (timecode format) of the missing event. Note this only work for values lower than 24 hours.
• %EVENT_SEG%: If an option has this value, then the value is dynamically replaced with the
Segment information (numeric format) of the missing event.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 247
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• %EVENT_BUFFER%: If an option has this value, then the value is dynamically replaced with all information (recfm80 format coded base64 ) of the missing event.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Add Options: Click this button to add a new line to the Options pane. Afterward, the user must edit the cell values of the new line (first cell is the option name, second cell is the option value).
EXAMPLE: How to setup CH process execution priority based on the on air time.
• Add an option with "REQUEST_PRIORITY=%EVENT_RTA%".
• The "REQUEST_PRIORITY" option property value is automatically filled in with the remaining time to air information of the missing event.
• This timecode information is then be used by the Content Handler engine to calculate the execution priority.
Remove Option: Select a currently specified option and then click this button to remove the selected line from the Options pane.
12. Select the CH Qualifiers tab. (Used for Content Handler Requester only)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Request primaries: Use this option to request (checked) or do not request (unchecked) primary events like secondary ones. By default for compatibility with old version the box is checked on.
Request secondaries: Check this option to request secondaries. When enabled, the IDs of missing secondary events will also initiate Content Handler process execution.
Abort unregistered requests: Check this option to abort any unregistered requests. When enabled, the missing events that are removed from the lookahead will cancel the process execution within Content Handler engine.
Note: An event can be removed from the lookahead if the size of the lookahead is reduced or if it is simply deleted from the lookahead.
List of exclusions: This pane lists the missing IDs that must NOT BE USED to initiate process execution. Specify the list of IDs to exclude, separated by semicolons.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 248
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
13. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
14. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Distributor Configuration (General)
The following is an example distributor configuration. Your distributor may have slightly different configuration options.
About Distributors
A distributor is a software object assigned to specific output connections of a device. A distributor can be assigned to any type of device: baseband, fibre channel or archive. Several distributors can be assigned to some types of devices to handle multiple requests or move several different spots at a time.
Most video file servers, for example, are able to move multiple spots simultaneously on a single fibre channel.
When a distributor receives an ID from a requester, it parses duplicate requests, transport and routing limitations and format mismatches.
If the device contains the media requested by the requester, it forwards the missing media event’s ID to a GMT list.
If the distributor does not contain the requested media, the event’s ID is passed to the next distributor.
If no other distributor is available, an error message is passed to the requester. Errors are displayed in the transmission list window.
Global Delete Workaround: If a recalled event remains in the Device Storage Window after performing a Global Delete, in versions 12.19.18 and above open the ADC1000NT.ini with Notepad, locate flag
DestUseIt, manually change this flag to TRUE, and then restart Device Server and Media Client. With this change the Global Delete Targets function will work as expected.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 249
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
To Configure a Distributor
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
1. Under Distributors in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Distributor device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab. This is where the name is set.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The name of the distributor. This name should be descriptive enough so you know what it is used for. The default is DISTRxx where xx is the position of the distributor within the server’s device list. This position is also known as the channel number. You may change the device name to any name you wish. There is a 16 character maximum.
4. Select Routing tab. Use this tab to configure routing. Source and destination devices can reside on any Device Server. This sets how the Distributor will execute the transfer of material.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 250
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Routing: Select one of the available routing options (the default is Baseband). This section allows configuring what type of media transfer this Distributor will perform. Each type of move is very specific. While a Requester can do multiple types of routing, each Distributor can only do one type.
• Baseband: Real time video signal (either analog or digital). Baseband includes SDI and SPIT modes. Default is enabled.
When baseband mode is selected, the Intermediate Destination becomes active.
With this configuration media transfers are done by video signal "Play" from source device, and "Recording" simultaneously in the destination device. In this routing mode, media duration determines how long will it takes to perform a media transfer. The GMT system can handle "Multi-hops" media transfer.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 251
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For example, if the first leg transfer is done by Baseband routing mode, the second leg of transfer can be done by either Fiber routing mode, or by Archive routing mode to reach the final destination specified in the Requestor or Multi-requestor. In this "Multi-hops" transfer mode, since the destination of the first leg baseband transfer is actually an "intermediate destination", it must be specified in the Baseband Routing mode for next leg transfer to use as a source for final transfer.
• Fibre: JPEG or MPEG compressed data files. Fibre mode is typically used when both the source and destination devices are video disks. Fibre transfers are typically non-realtime.
Default is disabled.
When Fibre mode is selected, the ‘Send Disk Command to" becomes active.
With this configuration missing media file found in a distributor source can be transferred to destination disk though the fiber network connecting source and destination disks. Since a media file contained in a VFS is in compressed mode, Fiber routing mode normally transfers media faster than "real-time", which is limited in baseband routing mode. The fiber distributor uses VDCP protocol to send media transfer commands to a VDCP complied VFS; both source and destination fiber handles are specified in a VDCP Copy command.
Some VFS prefer sending commands to the source VFS disk, while others prefer sending commands to the destination VFS disk. This option can be specified in configuration.
• Archive: Usually a SCSI connection between the archive system and the video disk server.
This mode is used when the source device is a digital archive device (e.g., a StorageTek or
Ampex DST) under control of an Avalon Archive Manager. Default is disabled.
With this configuration a distributor is configured as Archive routing mode. Media stored in a VFS can be controlled to Send-To-Archive, or Get-From-Archive through VACP protocol compliant Archive-Manager software. Since the Distributor doesn’t speak VACP protocol directly, the user must configure a VACP protocol handler, which is the "Standard Archive" device to the archive routing mode configured distributor. In the GUI, this is specified in the
"Server" and "Device" fields.
• WAN: Wide Area Network. This routing mode implies the transfer protocol will be FTP.
Source and Destination FTP server can be geometrically separate apart.
Intermediate Destination: (Active when Broadband is selected). When configuring a system to do baseband double hop, a fibre distributor needs to be in the search loop. This means that the fibre distributor needs to point to the intermediate destination, thus be on the same device server.
The options in this section differ depending on the type of move selected. For example, if an
Archive move was selected, it asks which Archive Device on which Device Server it will be using.
If a baseband type is selected, a section for intermediate destination will appear.
• Server: Use the pull-down list and select a server.
• Device: Use the pull-down list and select a device.
• Fiber Handle: The fibre handle needs to be the same as the intermediate disk. This is the unique fibre address assigned to the destination device. Each device on a fibre network must have a unique address. Typical valid entries are 0 through 99.
Double hop transfers occur as follows:
• First, the source baseband device will record to an intermediate disk. The source and intermediate device will reside on the same device server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 252
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Second, GMT will transfer the recorded media via fiber transfer mode to the destination device. The destination device resides on any device server, no longer the same device server as the source device.
In an Air and Protect scenario, there is one play and one record to an intermediate disk. After the transfer to the intermediate disk finishes the baseband distributor determines if the transfer is complete. In order to ensure the transfer is complete, it initializes two follow up fibre transfers. The first transfer is to the air disk and the second is to the protect disk which completes the transfer.
Send Disk Command to: (Active when Fibre is selected). Since disk vendors govern whether a fibre transfer can go to either the source or destination, the fibre routing mode is configurable.
Depending upon what is supportable by the disk, specify to send the commands to either:
• Destination device: (Default)
• Source device.
Standard Archive: (Active when Archive is selected)
• Server: Choose the correct server from the dropdown menu.
• Device: Choose the device name from the dropdown menu.
• Single Hop Archive Transfer only: Check to enable the source baseband device to record directly to destination device.
Proxy FTP: (Active when WAN is selected)
• Server: Choose the correct server from the dropdown menu.
• Device: Choose the device name from the dropdown menu.
5. Select Next Ring tab. Use this tab to configure this Distributor to pass requests on to another ring of
Distributors. This allows for multiple search paths for material and may be required or may be used to optimize the operation of GMT.
The device selected with the assigned distributor must reside on the correct server selected as well.
A Next Ring search path may only be configured on an "entry point" Distributor – that is, the first Distributor in a search path to which a Requester is directly passing requests.
At present, Automation only supports one level of Next Ring request forwarding.
Next-ring pointers are used to construct multiple distributor-rings to do media searches. This feature is especially important in a multi-channel facility. In this type of environment, the user wants to achieve three goals simultaneously:
• Share distributors among all play-lists,
• Prioritize the search sequence, and
• Balance the load among all sources.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 253
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The next-ring feature allows each request packet from each transmission list to travel the entire ring and return back to its entrance distributor before moving into the next-ring search of low priority devices (such as archive and baseband devices) instead of terminating the search at the first ring. It is only possible to construct two (2) rings.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Distributor: This is where the first Distributor in the next search ring is set. This can be set in different ways as each Distributor may be able to pass requests on to enter the search ring at a different location.
• Server: This is the server name that the destination device is physically connected to.
Choose the correct server from the dropdown menu.
• Device: Choose the device name associated with the destination device from the dropdown menu.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 254
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. Select Source tab. Use this tab to specify the device supplying material and also to link to additional distributors. The source device can be a cart machine, a standalone VTR or a play port of a video disk server.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Server: This is the server name that the destination device is physically connected to. Choose the correct server from the dropdown menu. This parameter specifies which Device Server this
Distributor is looking at to get its device for the material it is to transfer. Once the Device Server is selected, the devices configured on that Device Server are available for selection.
Device: Choose the device name associated with the destination device from the dropdown menu.
Fibre Handle: This is the unique fibre address assigned to the destination video disk. Each video disk on a fibre network must have a unique address. Valid entries are 0 through 99.
Note: By using the up/down buttons, values over 99 can be entered.
Fibre Handle is used only if this Distributor is using Fibre, Archive or WAN routing. A fibre handle is required for all fibre transfers to be executed. A fibre handle is required for Global Delete
Distributors, although it may be the fibre handle of any device among the delete targets.
If this is an Archive or WAN Distributor, the fibre handle set here may refer to the destination for Archive and WAN transfers.
Wait until missing media is available: When enabled (checked), GMT waits for the missing media on the source device specified on the distributor. The missing media is placed on the GMT list and stays red until the media is found. Typically used on a VTR.
• If your Baseband source device is a Cart Machine, you may wish to enable this option.
• If your Baseband source device is an external VTR, this option must be enabled.
This forces the Distributor to insert GMT events on the GMT list even if they are missing from of the Cart Machine or if an operator is required to insert the tape into the external
VTR. When disabled (unchecked), the missing media is skipped and media searching passes
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 255
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager down to the next available distributor (or returns an error to the play list). This gives the operator time to locate and insert the tape.
When disabled (unchecked), the source material is not found in the source machine, nothing is put on the GMT list, and the transfer fails without the operator being allowed to find the source tape. The missing media is skipped and media searching passes down to the next available distributor (or returns an error to the play list).
Note: This option is only available with baseband and archive routing. Fibre mode is not supported.
Next Distributor: Specify an additional distributor for locating material. This parameter is used when there is more than one place the missing material may be found. By telling this Distributor to pass the request on to another Distributor, you are creating a chain. Without this, the request would fail if the material could not be found in the device listed in this tab.
For example, you may have multiple distributors, each associated with a different cart machine.
If a distributor cannot process a request because the requested material is not within its source device (i.e., the ID is not in the cart machine), it can pass the request to the next distributor in the chain which may be able to locate the material. All linked distributors must reside on the same device server and be assigned to the same GMT list. It is recommended to link the last distributor back to the first distributor to form a closed loop so that any distributor on the linked list can be the initial distributor (as pointed to by a requester in a multi-requester environment).
7. Select Segments tab. Two kinds of multi-segment file name conventions exist in a videodisk and archive system; the Single-File-Multi-Segment (SFMS), or the Multi-File-Multi-Segment (MFMS). In an SFMS convention, all segments with the same program ID will reference the same file name without a segment number. In an MFMS convention, each segment will have a unique file name using the media ID name with a one or two digit segment number forms this unique file name.
Therefore, there are three ways a multi-segmented program event can be translated into a unique file name in a videodisk or archive system: (1) By using the ID for all segments, (2) Modifying the last digit of the ID with the segment number, (3) Modifying the last 2 digits of the ID with the segment number. At many facilities, the methods above would be mutually exclusive to prevent confusion within the video server or archive device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 256
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
In order to help prevent file name conflicts for multi-segment events, the Segments tab is used to configure the search order for multi-segment IDs and how many digits of its associated segment number will be used to create the filename for a particular media ID segment.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Max ID Length: Specify the maximum ID length of the segment. (Default: 32)
Number: Specify how many of the last digits are to be used to form an ID name. Highlight a segment number, and then…
• Use Up/Down buttons are used to specify the direction and order to be used to search for segmented ID files in a device.
• Use Enable/Disable buttons are used to enable or disable searches for the selected number of last digits to form a segmented ID. When enabled, it has a red background.
Use Distributor Segment setting over Disks: When enabled (checked), the GMT fiber transfer refers to the distributor’s segment setting instead of the destination disk’s setting.
Note: The ‘Wait for missing media until it is available function" is currently not supported
(grayed out) in this mode, because it is unknown which ID should be put in GMT list to wait.
8. Select Global Delete Targets tab. Media Client allows an operator to "Global Delete" a specified media through a Media Client-configured Fiber routing mode distributor. The specified media ID will be deleted from multiple destination VFS that are specified in "Global Delete Targets" tab sheet of a
Fiber Distributor.
If this Distributor is to be used to handle delete requests to multiple video servers, this is where it will be configured. Some systems will have the requirement to delete from video servers that cannot be accessed directly from Media Client. This tab allows for deletion of material from those video disks. Under the Routing tab, this Distributor MUST be configured to do fibre transfers.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 257
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Global Delete Targets can be added or deleted, they cannot be edited. Each target can be set to access any Video Server on any Device Server. Each target MUST have a fibre handle configured as well.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Add button: Click the Add button to display a dialog box allowing you to enter crosspoints. A total 16 "Global Delete Targets" can be specified in the form "Server (ADC server)", "Device (VFS ports)" and "Handle (Fiber handle number)".
Note: The Global Delete target should be a video disk.
Note: The only allowable routing mode is fibre mode.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 258
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Note: If Delete Target specifies a VTR, cart machine or archive destination, or if the routing mode is baseband or archive, the Global Delete command is ignored.
9. Select Diagnostics tab. When this tab is selected the real-time internal log is displayed. The
Distributor can also be reinitialized from this tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Mode: Select one of the diagnostic modes: Event Log, ID Trace, or Buffer Dump
• Event Log: An event log is a real-time status display for the Distributor. As requests are processed by the Distributor, the RunState Status pane will update dynamically and display the current status of the operation.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 259
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
If the diagnostics window has been opened in modeless state, the data written to the
RunState Status window will also be written to the text log file.
• ID Trace. When selected, the diagnostics window will display an Input ID / Segment field.
Enter an ID you wish to trace in the Input ID field (and a segment number if this is a multisegment ID) and click Start Trace.
The current status of the ID is displayed in the RunState Status pane. If the diagnostics window has been opened in modeless state, the status is written to the text log file as well.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 260
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Buffer Dump: When selected, the contents of the Distributor’s buffer can written to the
RunState Status pane.
Click the Start Dump button and the Distributor will write the contents of its buffer to the
RunState Status pane.
This action does not clear the contents of the Distributor’s buffer – that can only be accomplished by clicking the Reinitialize button. If the diagnostics window has been opened in modeless state, the buffer data will be written to the text log file as well.
Setup Status: Displays an event log in a real-time for the Distributor.
RunState Status: Displays contents for a Trace Log or Buffer Dump.
Start Dump button: Available in Buffer Dump mode. When selected the Distributor writes the contents of its buffer to the RunState Status pane.
This action does not clear the contents of the Distributor’s buffer – that can only be accomplished by clicking the Reinitialize button. If the diagnostics window has been opened in modeless state, the buffer data is written to the text log file as well.
Reinitialize button: Click Reinitialize to clear the Distributor’s collection of pending requests and reset all of its internal variables to zero. Any pending requests on the Transmission List will be marked FAILED.
10. Apply the Configuration Changes: When changes are made to a device’s configuration, the Apply button on the configuration GUI becomes active. Click the Apply button to immediately apply that configuration change to the system configuration held in random access memory by the Device
Server.
Note: Apply does not write the configuration change to the Device Server’s configuration files. This can only be done by using the Save Devices option on the Configured Devices window’s File menu.
11. Save the Configuration: From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the
Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 261
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Attempting to close the Configured Devices window without first saving any configuration changes, results in the Configuration Manager prompting to save the changes on the Device
Server. Accepting this prompt writes the configuration changes to the Device Server’s configuration files as well.
Proxy Device Configuration (General)
ProxyFTP devices are software gateways the automation system uses to initiate FTP file transfers between video servers over a wide area network (WAN). Like archives, they are not media devices in the sense that they are not assigned to lists, they cannot cue and play, and they are not capable of producing an I/O stream. Instead, ProxyFTP devices interpret commands from the automation system and pass them on to the video server’s file system through an Ethernet connection to the WAN. FTP file transfers using a ProxyFTP device can only be accomplished though the use of GMT components. For more information about ProxyFTP devices and GMT see section: Global Media Transfer.
The following example is an example Proxy device configuration. Your device may have different options. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Proxy Device
1. Under Proxies in the Available pane (right pane), select a device (e.g. Proxy FTP or Factum) and dragn-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device
to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Proxy device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. The options available on this tab depend on the device selected.
For example: The following General tabs show options for PXFTP (left) and Factum (right) selections.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 262
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Configure the following properties are required:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For PXFTP.
• Device Name: (Default: PXFTP)This parameter defines the name of the PXFTP driver into the adc1000nt configuration..
• Designated FTP Resource Manager: In the ADC system, there is one "Siteconf.ini" file to store the login parameters of each configured FTP server site. To prevent conflict, the information in this "Siteconf.ini" file is shared among all ProxyFTP devices for "read access", but only one ProxyFTP device is granted "write access" to create and edit this file.
Enable (check) this option to give this particular ProxyFTP device the right to create, add, delete and modify this "Siteconf.ini" file. If an ProxyFTP device is assigned as FTP Resource
Manager, the ProxyFTP device name will be displayed with an associated asterisk "*" mark in the Configuration Device window.
• Reinitialize button: Click to reinitialize the ProxyFTP device. When selected the following prompt appears.
For Factum DBS.
• Device Name: (Default: FACTUM)This parameter defines the name of the Factum driver into the adc1000nt configuration..
• Host Name: (Default: "localhost") This parameter identifies the default address of the
Factum DBS100 System the driver is communicating with. This parameter can take an IP address in either dotted or alphanumerical notations.
• In Folder: (Default: C:\IN\) This parameter specifies the folder path, where the input files for the Factum DBS100 device driver will be placed to. The device driver will check this folder 20 times per second and process the input files. After being processed, the field is deleted from the input folder.
Note: Always specify the last slash character in the configured path. For example: "C:\IN\" – correct, "C:\IN" – incorrect.
Note: The driver processes files in ascending order according to their filenames and those files should have the ".xml" extension.
• Out Folder: (Default: C:\OUT\)This parameter specifies the folder path, where the output files with the responses from the Factum DBS100device driver will be placed to.
Note: Always specify the last slash character in the configured path. For example: "C:\OUT\"
– correct, "C:\OUT" – incorrect.
Note: The output file with the response from the Factum DBS100 server will have the same filename, as the input file name. If a file with such a name already exists in the folder, it will not be rewritten until the previous file is removed.
• Logging: (Default: false (unchecked)) This parameter enables or disables logging of actions performed by the Factum DBS100 driver. It’s recommended to check this control if any
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 263
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager troubles occurred while working with the proxy device server (logging may require a lot of disk space for log files).
Note: The logging information is stored on a local hard drive, disk "C:\". The file name is formed according to the following scheme: log_Factum_mm_dd_yy_xxxx.txt, where mm_dd_yy – current date and xxxx – random generated number.
4. Select the Disk Type tab. (Proxy FTP only)
Configure the following properties are required:
Select the disk type from the listing of available devices.
• Generic (or Generic FTP): Select to specify using the industry standard "RFC 959" FTP protocol. When selected, Ext List becomes active.
• Omneon: Select to specify using Omneon’s proprietary media format (instead of .MXF format) for FTP transfers using the Omneon proprietary API.
This functionality requires the use of Omneon’s proprietary DLL module. It is strongly recommended that a separate bridge computer be used to hold this ProxyFTP device alone.
Passive Mode: Check to enable.
Ext List: (Default: *). (Active when Generic is selected) Specify file extension(s) for FTP transfer.
The operator may specify "mxf" as the extension for FTP transfer.
• The default value "*" means any extension is qualified for the specified media ID.
• If multiple file extensions are specified in the FTP transfer, they can be entered into the same extension box, but separated by space.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 264
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
5. Select the Site List tab. (Proxy FTP only)
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following properties are required:
Add button: Launches a site management dialog. Use this dialog to specify transfer sites. When finished click OK.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 265
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Edit Button: To edit an existing site entry, select an entry from the site list display and then click
Edit. The site management dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected entry. Make changes as required, and then click OK.
Delete button: To delete an existing site entry, select an entry from the site list display and then click Delete.
6. Select the Connect tab. (Proxy FTP only)
Configure the following properties are required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 266
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Destination: Specify the destination device for the transfer. Use the dropdown arrow to select for a list of available devices.
Source: Specify the source device of the transfer. Use the dropdown arrow to select for a list of available devices.
Meta data required for transfer: Enable (check) to include metadata in the transfer.
7. Select the Diagnostics tab. This tab displays diagnostic information for the PXFTP. (Proxy FTP only)
8. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
9. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Transcode Configuration (General)
The following is an example Transcode configuration. Your device may have different options. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Transcode Device
1. Under Archives in the Available pane (right pane), select a Transcoder device (i.e., FlipFactory or FPD
VAST BitSCREAM) and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a
device see: To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Transcode device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab. The options available on this tab depend on the device selected.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 267
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For example: The following General Tabs show options for FlipFactory (left) and BitScream (right) selections.
Configure the following parameters as required:
For Flip Factory:
• Device Name: This parameter defines the name of the driver into the adc1000nt configuration. (Default: FLIPF).
• Host Name: This parameter identifies the Telestream Flip Factory System the driver is communicating with. This parameter can take a name or an IP address. (Default: localhost).
• Port: This parameter identifies the Telestream Flip Factory System the driver is communicating with. This parameter can vary from 0 to 65535. Default parameter is "9000".
• Factory Name: This parameter defines the factory that will be used to transcode the files.
This parameter must be configured according to the Telestream Flip Factory settings.
Default parameter is "".
• Priority: This parameter defines the priority to attach to each transcode command. The supported values are from 1 (lowest) to 9 (highest). Default parameter is "5".
• User Name: This parameter defines the user name that will be used to access specified factory for transcoding the files. This parameter must be configured according to the
Telestream Flip Factory settings. Default parameter is "".
• Password: This parameter defines the password that will be used for the current user name to access specified factory for transcoding the files. This parameter must be configured according to the Telestream Flip Factory settings. Default parameter is "".
• Polling: This parameter enables or disables polling the Flip Factory server by the ADC Flip
Factory Transcoder driver. The polling period is about 2 seconds. It’s highly recommended to check this control, otherwise the Flip Factory status information will not be monitored while transcoding nothing. Default parameter is false (unchecked).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 268
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Timeout (msec): This parameter identifies the Polling period for the Telestream Flip Factory driver in milliseconds. This parameter can vary from 1000 to 60000. Default parameter is
"2000".
• Logging: This parameter enables or disables logging of actions performed by the Flip Factory
Transcoder driver. It’s recommended to check this control if any troubles occurred while working with the Flip Factory server (logging may require a lot of disk space for log files).
Default parameter is false (unchecked).
Note: The logging information will be stored on a local hard drive, disk "C:\". The file name is formed according to the following scheme: log_FF_mm_dd_yy_xxxx.txt, where mm_dd_yy – current date and xxxx – random generated number.
• Source FH: This parameter specifies the value for the Fiber Handle to use each time the driver receives the request from distributor. This parameter can vary from 0 to 10000.
Default parameter is "0".
If the parameter is zero the source Fiber handle of the request received is used to find the configuration options within the flipfactory.ini file.
If the parameter is nonzero, then the source Fiber handle value of the request received is ignored and the options from flipfactory.ini are extracted according to the Source FH parameters value.
Note: This option may be used when only one distributor points to Flip Factory driver. If two or more distributors are configured to point to the same Flip Factory driver we strongly recommend to set this parameter to "0", so that for request from different distributors there may be used their own specific setting from the flipfactory.ini file.
• Reinitialize button: Click this button to make the Flip Factory driver re-read the flipfactory.ini file with the configuration.
For Front Porch Digital (FPD) VAST BitSCREAM:
• Device Name: This parameter defines the name of the driver into the adc1000nt configuration. (Default: BSCRM).
• Host Name: This parameter identifies the BitScream system the driver is communicating with. This parameter can take a name or an IP address. (Default: screamer).
• Transcoder ID: (Default: 0, Range: 0 - 9) This parameter defines the transcoder that will be used to transcode the files.
If set to 0, the VAST BitSCREAM system is configured in load balancing mode (Transcoder automatically selected by the transcoding system).
If set to positive value (greater than 0), the adc1000nt driver selects the transcoder to be used and only this one will be used for transcoding.
Note: The Transcoder ID is randomly generated and hardcoded by Front Porch Digital. As per Front Porch Digital, there is no upper limit to this #; they are generated sequentially starting from 1. However, if a transcoder is deleted, its transcoder ID will not be re-used.
(Actual range: 0- 9999)
• Source ID: (Default: 1, Range: 1 - 10000) This parameter defines the source directory
(storage) that will be used to get the files to be transcoded. It must match a Source ID (using ftp) declared and configured in the VAST BitSCREAM.
• Source Extension: (Default: .mpg) This parameter defines the extension of the source filenames from the Source ID. When the driver is declared, the Default parameter is ".mpg"
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 269
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager for the source extension. Then, it can be modified to another value. Ensure that the correct case is used.
Note: The driver does not insert the "." (dot) character automatically between the filename and the extension. The "." (dot) character must be set in the "Source Extension" field.
Note: A blank field can be configured. In this case, this configuration means that there is no extension for the IDs to be transcoded.
• Priority: (Default: 5) This parameter defines the priority to attach to each transcode command. The supported values are from 1 (lowest) to 9 (highest).
4. Select Transcoding Parameters tab. (For FPD VAST BitSCREAM)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Destination ID: (Default: 2, Range: 1 - 10000) This parameter identifies the destination device
(storage) that will receive the transcoded files. This parameter must match a Destination ID configured in the VAST BitSCREAM.
Destination Formats: (Default: VOD) Select a destination format: VOD or Others (non VOD).
When "VOD" is selected, "Others" is unchecked and the text area is empty and grayed.
• If "VOD" format is selected, the transcoding request manages a single output format (VOD).
• If "Others" format is selected, the transcoding request manages single or multiple output formats depending of the content of text area (Description field).
Description field / Text area: This text area field becomes active when Others format is selected. The Text area can contain several formats separated with a comma. If several formats are specified in the list, then a transcoding request will manage simultaneous output formats per transcoding request.
• Example for a Single format request (Windows Media): "WM".
• Example for a Multiple format request (Windows Media & Real Media): "WM,RM".
All the supported outputs formats depend on the capabilities of the VAST BitSCREAM. Ensure the proper labels for the format(s) are configured. Current supported outputs formats and associated codes are:
• WM - Windows Media
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 270
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
• RM - Real Media
• QT - Quick Time
• MPGP - MPEG-1/2 program stream
• PINN - Pinnacle Video Server
• GVG - Grass Valley Group video server
• LMPG - Leitch video server with MPEG content
• DV25 - DV-25 mbps
• OMF - AVID OMF
• OMN - Omneon Video Server
5. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Archive Configuration (General)
Archives, archive managers and archive systems are controlled though an Ethernet connection, rather than a point-to-point RS-422 serial connection. The Device Server’s second network interface (bound to
TCP/IP protocol) connects to a separate network hub or switch that allows it communicate with the archive. Archives are not media devices in the sense that they are not assigned to lists, they cannot cue and play, and they are not capable of producing an I/O stream. Instead, archives stream data into a video server for playout. A video server may also stream data into an archive for storage. Archives are strictly data storage devices and may only be accessed by the automation through GMT components.
The Device Server application does maintain a storage collection for archive devices, which may be viewed from the Device Storage window in either the Air or Media Client application. For more information about archives and GMT, see section Global Media Transfer.
The following is an example Archive configuration. Your device may have different options. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure an Archive Device
1. Under Archives in the Available pane (right pane), select an Archive device (Standard Archive) and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a
Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the Archive device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select General tab. (Standard Archive.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 271
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Change this to the preferred name for the device, up to 5 characters.
Archive Parameters:
• Instance: Number of copies of each spot to put on tape when executing a Copy to Archive command.
• Copy From Priority: The priority to attach to each Copy From Archive command. 1 means highest priority; 16 means lowest priority.
• Copy To Priority: The priority to attach to each Copy to Archive command. 1 means highest priority; 16 means lowest priority.
• Group: The group name to use in a Copy to Archive command.
4. Select Socket tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 272
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Socket Information:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Host: Enter the IP host address of the Sun workstation running the Avalon Archive Manager software.
• Port: Enter the IP port number on which the AAM process is running its VACP interface. This value should be 1025.
5. Select VACP Manager tab. Use this tab to select your Archive Manager from the list of available devices.
6. Select Storage tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 273
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
ID List Options: Select one of the following List ID options. During the Archive Device’s initial connection to the Archive Manager, the user can choose what kind of storage ID collection is desired. Archive Device uses VACP (Video Archive Communication Protocol) to request ID and status associated with each ID. These Archive IDs can be displayed in the Air Client Archive
Storage Window for browsing. When the GMT List queries Archive Device for the existence of an
ID, this Archive storage collection is not referenced. Rather, the VACP ID query command is sent directly to the Archive Manager for refresh status.
• Request ID Name List and Status: When selected this option instructs the ADC Archive
Device to collect all ID name and its associated status. If the archive storage has a huge amount of IDs stored, this option may take a significant amount of time to process. This is because some Archive Manager products respond to slower than others VACP ID-Request commands.
• Request ID Name List Only: If only ID name is required without detail ID status, this option can be much faster to process for slower Archive Manager products.
• No ID List Required: When this option is selected, no ID collection is maintained in the ADC
Archive Device. This will not affect archive query, nor will it affect archive media transfer.
The only limitation is the user will not be able to browse the Archive Storage Window from the ADC system. However, users can still use the browser tool provided with Archive
Manager to browse content of archive storage.
7. Select Diagnostics tab. Use this tab to view diagnostic summary. If required, click the Reinitialize button to reinitialize the device.
8. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
9. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 274
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Video Effect Device Configuration (General)
The following is an example video effect device configuration. Your video effect device may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Video Effect Device
1. Under Video Effect Devices in the Available pane (right pane), select a device (e.g. Pinnacle
DVExtreme) and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device
see: To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. Fields displayed depend on the device selected.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed.
Options:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 275
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Back-time value in frames: This parameter determines when commands should be sent to the device. A non-zero value in this field indicates the number of frames that commands will be sent early (during preroll, before the play counter actually starts).
This value is set at 1 by default, it shouldn’t need to be changed.
However if the timing of the device and DVE commands are off with respect to the switcher, this parameter may be changed to adjust the output timing. This parameter does not change the timing for secondary data commands, only A/V events.
• Enable Internal Keyer: Check to enable.
When enabled (checked), the video is brought up on the output at the On Air Time of the
Event. It is then cleared when the event is done. There is no preview ability when keyer mode is enabled. The Timing value adjusts when the video appears on the output. It is expected the program video will be put into the device so the internal keyer can overlay the
Logo on its output.
When disabled (unchecked), the device server brings up the video on the output of the device as soon as the event is cued. In this way the operator can see the correct video on a preview monitor if desired. The output could be feed into a keyer of a master control switcher, or another external keyer. After the event is done, the video is left on the output of the device unless it is needed for another event.
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select the Diagnostics tab. (Available for Quastech Charisma DVE).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 276
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Select Reinitialize to reinitialize the device.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
7. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Still Store Device Configuration (General)
The following is an example still store (i.e. still store or logo generator) configuration. Your device may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Still Store Device
1. Under Still Stores in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. The available options depend on the selected device. (For example, the following General tabs show options for a Leitch DTP 20, a LogoMotion2, an Imagestore750, a Sony
SSCU 1000, and an SAV LGA100.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 277
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 278
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required and available:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
The "Device Name" appears in the Device Status and configuration window on the client applications. The default name may be used, but it is recommended to use unique names for easy device identification.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
• This string is placed in the ID field of events that will be played by this device.
• The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed. Such secondary data events include those that delete spots, transfer an archived spot, delete protect spots, or undelete protect spots.
Evertz 9725 LGA – 16 char logo Note: Assign the Evertz 9725 LGA – 16 char logo names to a
Transmission List to be schedule to air. The Evertz 9725 LGA – 16 char logo names uses A/V,
Secondary A/V, and Secondary Data Events to execute the pre-loading and playout of Logos.
Options.
• Back-time value in frames: This parameter determines when commands should be sent to the device. A non-zero value in this field indicates the number of frames that commands will be sent early (during preroll, before the play counter actually starts).
This value is set at 1 by default, it shouldn’t need to be changed.
However if the timing of the device and DVE commands are off with respect to the switcher, this parameter may be changed to adjust the output timing. This parameter does not change the timing for secondary data commands, only A/V events.
LogoMotion2 Note: This driver allows an "EarlyFrameCount" value as low as -5 frames. An
"Early Frame Count" value less than zero means the duration of the event is less than it was
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 279
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager scheduled. For example, if "Early frame count" = -3 then the actual duration DUR’ = DUR – 3; where DUR is the scheduled duration.
ImageStore, ImageStore750, and ImageStore Intuition Note: In Device Server v12.19 and higher the maximum negative value for the ‘Back-time value in frames’ parameter is -70.
• Timeout value in frames: (for Iconstation XML) This is a special value used to specify the time to wait for "Load Layout" and "Setup All Items" commands. By default it is 150*3 = 450 frames.
If the IconStation doesn’t reply "Request Executed Successfully" to "Load Layout" and
"Setup All Items" commands during this interval, the driver reports "Communication Lost error" and continues sending next commands.
• Playback Card ID: (For LogoMotion and LogoMotion2). Under normal circumstances this parameter should be left at 2.
• Stop Current Play After Initialize: (For LogoMotion2). Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) allowing the device to keep playing the logo(s) if the channel(s) is(are) not scheduled to play.
• Enable Internal Keyer: Check to enable.
When enabled (checked), the video is brought up on the output at the On Air Time of the
Event. It is then cleared when the event is done. There is no preview ability when keyer mode is enabled. The Timing value adjusts when the video appears on the output. It is expected the program video will be put into the device so the internal keyer can overlay the
Logo on its output.
When disabled (unchecked), the device server brings up the video on the output of the device as soon as the event is cued. In this way the operator can see the correct video on a preview monitor if desired. The output could be feed into a keyer of a master control switcher, or another external keyer. After the event is done, the video is left on the output of the device unless it is needed for another event.
• Storage Check: (for Miranda ImageStore, ImageStore 750, and Miranda Intuition). Enable
(check) if the logo's ID is available in the device storage. Disable (uncheck) this option, if the
Still Store device does not support the storage check. This lets the list blindly register the event (i.e. turn the event to blue).
• Guaranteed storage time: This parameter is available when Storage Check is enabled. This parameter specifies the time (MM:SS) during which media will not change. (i.e. it is the interval of recheck events in a playlist.) Default: 30 seconds. Range: 10-99. Recommended:
Specification for this parameters should be a multiple of 10 seconds.
Device Type. (For LogoMotion 2) Select one:
• SD: Choose this option if device type is Standard Definition. The Standard Definition has 4 keyers (4 layers).
• HD: Choose this option if device type is High Definition. The HD version has only 2 layers.
DTP Parameters (For Leitch DTP20, mCapture) Specify:
• Client ID: Goal of this parameter to distinguish the answers from different clients which work with the same DTP (mCapture) device. If there is only one client, use default value (10) or choose any other value in the range [0..65000]. If there are several clients, specify different clients ID for each (the real values do not matter. They just need to be different.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 280
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select the Communications tab. (Available for LogoMotion 2 and SAV 50DK) Use this tab to configure the following parameters as required: Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 281
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. Select the Socket tab. (Available for Leitch DTP20, PixelPower Clarity, and mCapture devices)
Configure the following parameters as required:
Socket Information.
• Host: (Default: 127.0.0.1)
• Port: (Default: 49227). This default value was defined in the description of the RCS Protocol.
Both drivers – DTP and mCapture use this protocol.
Log Setting.
Both drivers can create own log file. This file can be created in the folder where DS will be started from or forwarded to another computer.
• Enable: (Default: unchecked) Check to enable Log creation.
• Forwarding: Enable (check) to forward the created log to another computer. When this option is checked (enabled) Forwarding Address and Forwarding Port are active.
Disable (uncheck) if the log file can be created in the folder where the Device Server will be started.
• Forwarding Address: When this option is active, specify the IP Address of the computer the log will be forwarded to.
• Forwarding Port: When this option is active, specify the Port to use on the computer the log will be forwarded to.
7. Select the Layouts tab. (For IconStation XML). Use this tab to to view a list of all layouts, and the salvos and items corresponding to them.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 282
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Available Layouts: Select layouts from the dropdown list.
'Update' button allows updating the layouts list if it was changed or is empty ('None').
"Available salvos" pane: Displays the salvos available based on the selected layouts.
"Available items" pane: Displays the devices available based on the selected layouts.
Note: If 'None' is displayed on the screen, then the IconStation driver didn't receive a layouts list
(the most probable issue that connection is not established).
8. Select the Diagnostics tab.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 283
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters are required:
Reinitialize button: If required, click Reinitialize button to reinitialize the device. This clears the buffers in the driver and resets the connection to the device. This should only be used for troubleshooting purposes.
IconStation XML Troubleshooting: Operators can send test commands to the IconStation for trouble shooting purposes or execution of data events without Air Client.
• Command: Select a display command from the dropdown list. All display commands of the
IconStation protocol are listed except for 'Get Bypass' and 'Set Bypass'.
• Parameters of command: Specify the required command based on the format displayed for the selected command.
9. Select the "Device" Channel tab. (Available on SubDev selections only) Some Make/Model devices will offer additional functionality through a sub-device. This tab is where the device driver of a primary device is associated with the related sub-device (SubDev) driver.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 284
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For Example: The Quartz Logo has an optional DVE sub-device. The following screen shot shows the
QuartzQMC Channel tab for a Quartz Logo DVE SubDev selection. In this situation the Quartz QMC device driver is configured, then the Quartz Logo DVE SubDev driver is configured. The QuartzQMC
Channel tab is where the two drivers are associated.
EvertzQmcMCS Note: The Logo and DVE sub device driver cannot be used without configuring the
QMC MCS device driver first. The "EvertzQMC for DVE&Logo" Subdev must also be assigned to the
Transmission List where the Evertz Switcher is used.
10. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
11. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Character Generator Device Configuration
(General)
The following is an example character generator device (e.g. Chyron MAXINE, Aston CG) configuration.
Your device may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Character Generator Device
1. Under Character Generators in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 285
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
3. Select the General tab. Options available may differ depending in the device selected.
For example: The following General tabs show options for a Chyron Max (left), a Presto DBR (right), a Chyron HyperX (lower left),and a Chyron Duet2 (lower right).
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed.
Options.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 286
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Back-time value in frames: This parameter determines when commands should be sent to the device. A non-zero value in this field indicates the number of frames that commands will be sent early (during preroll, before the play counter actually starts). This value is set at 1 by default, it shouldn’t need to be changed.
• Address: Specify the Address of the CG
• Enable Internal Keyer: Check to enable internal keyer.
When enabled the Program Out line will overlay the graphics onto external video whenever the list event for the CG is on air. Also, the user has the option of enabling Key Hold which will not turn off the keyer after an event finishes playing and the Key Hold will remain in effect until it is ended by another event.
When disabled the internal keyer is always turned on such that the Program Out and
Program Key Out are always enabled as input to a downstream keyer.
• Display First Frame of Image When Cued: (For Chyron Duet 2, Duet LEx) Enable (check) /
Disable (uncheck) allowing the load image command to set the attribute to display the first frame to the frame buffer. This provides operators with the cueing option of either showing the first frame of a cued event or not on the output of the Duet.
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 287
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
5. Select the Communications tab. (Available for Chyron Duet selections) On this tab configure the following parameters as required: Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity.
6. Select the Diagnostics tab. Click Reinitialize button to reinitialize the device, if required.
7. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
8. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Audio Disk Cart Configuration (General)
The following is an example audio disk cart configuration (e.g. Digicart, Sony Mini Disk, etc.). Your device may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 288
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To Configure an Audio Disk Device
1. Under Audio Disk Carts in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. Options available may differ depending on the device selected.
For example: The following General tabs show options for a Enco DAD (left), Digicart (right), Sony
Mini Disk (lower left), Sony MD B3 (lower right).
Configure the following parameters as required:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 289
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
This name is used in the ID field of an event that is to be assigned to the device. You can use the default name or assign another name if multiple devices are in the system.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed.
Options.
• Back-time value in frames: This parameter determines when play commands should be sent to the device. A non-zero value in this field indicates the number of frames that commands will be sent early (during preroll, before the play counter actually starts). This value is set at
1 by default, it shouldn’t need to be changed.
• Update Durations from Audio Tracks: Check to enable the update of durations with actual durations from audio tracks.
• Stop Before Play: (Digicart Option) If enabled (checked), a STOP command is sent from the
Device server to the Digicart before each PLAY command. If a cut is still playing this ensures it will be stopped and the new cut played immediately.
• Sort Storage by Title: (Digicart Option) If enabled (checked), the cuts in the device storage window are sorted by cut titles. If disabled (unchecked), the window is sorted by cut number.
• Enable Storage Sorted by Title: (Sony Option) If enabled (checked), the cuts in the device storage window are sorted by cut titles. If disabled (unchecked), the window is sorted by cut number.
• Sony MDS Model: (Sony Option) Check to enable if this is a Sony MDS Model.
Preroll Timings: (Dalet Options)
• Send play at Preroll: Click to enable send of a play command at preroll.
• Frames to send play early: Specify the number of frames that the play command will be sent early (during preroll, before the play counter actually starts). This value is set at 1 by default, it shouldn’t need to be changed.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 290
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select the Diagnostics tab. As required:
Reinitialize button: Click to reinitialize the device.
Reverify Storage button: (available for Digicart) Click to reverify device storage.
6. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
7. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 291
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Serial Device Configuration (General)
The following is an example ‘serial device’ configuration. Your ‘serial device’ (such as a David
MultiPlayer, a FAB Subtitler, and an Ayato Remote) may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Serial Device
1. Under Serial Devices in the Available pane (right pane), select a device and drag-n-drop it to the
Configured Pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device
Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. In the Configured Pane (left pane), select a ‘Serial device, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab. Options available may differ depending on the device selected.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 292
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
This name is used in the ID field of an event that is to be assigned to the device. You can use the default name or assign another name if multiple devices are in the system.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
Timings / Preroll Timings:
• Send play at Preroll: Click to enable send of a play command at preroll.
• Frames to send play early: Specify the latency - in frames (positive or negative) - for sending the Play command (during preroll, before the play counter actually starts). This value is typically set at the default level for the device and shouldn’t need to be changed.
For Example: +4 frames (4 frames after on air time).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 293
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Frames to send stop early: Specify the latency - in frames (positive or negative) - for sending the Stop command. This value is typically set at the default level for the device and shouldn’t need to be changed.
For Example: 0 frames (last frame of clip).
• Polling Delay (Frames): Specify the frequency (in frames) of polling the device. Default: 25 frames.
• ID Request Polling Delay (Frames): Frequency (in frames) of the device polling when command is executing (the "Pending" status is received). Default: 25 frames.
Number of command retries: Specify the number of times to retry a command, if the response was not received during the command timeout.
Clear OnAir Subtitle When Start: This parameter allows active subtitles on to remain on-air when the Device Server application starts.
• When this option is enabled (checked), the driver clears active subtitles.
• When the option is disabled (unchecked), on-air subtitles remain active and on-air.
Send ID Only: (for Screen Subtitler 24) This option determines the device driver mode used.
• When this option is enabled (checked), the driver uses the ‘ID’ and ‘Title’ fields of the commands only for ID, so a passed ID can be up to 24 characters.
• When option is disabled (unchecked), the behavior of the driver matches the behavior of the SCREEN_SRV2 driver.
Note: Changing this setting does not affect the device operation mode, only driver mode.
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 294
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
5. Select the Communications tab. On this tab configure the following parameters as required: Baud
Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity.
6. Select the Channel tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Select each Player Channel Number and fill in the channel number for each head of the NDS ESS device. The NDS ESS device is a 10 headed device. By default the channel number for each head is assigned as 0001 through 0010 for the respective heads.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 295
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
7. Select the Macros tab.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Add button: Click the Add button to enter a macro. When finished click OK.
• Macro Name: Enter a mnemonic to help the operator identify the macro name.
• Macro: Enter the macro commands.
Edit Button: To edit an existing macro entry, select a macro entry from the list display and then click Edit. An edit dialog is displayed populated with the parameters currently specified for the selected macro. Make changes as required, and then click OK.
Delete button: To delete an existing macro entry, select a macro entry from the list display and then click Delete.
8. Select the Diagnostics tab. Options available depend on the serial device:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 296
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Reinitialize button: Click to reinitialize the device.
Reset Timer # button: Click to reset the timer. Click yes when system prompts to confirm.
9. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
10. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Advanced Device Configuration (General)
The following is an example ‘advanced device’ configuration. Your ‘advanced device’ may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure an Advanced Device
1. Under Advanced Devices in the right pane, select a device and drag-n-drop it to the left pane. For
details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. In the left pane, select an ‘Advanced’ device, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties.
The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 297
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
3. Select the General tab.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
This name is used in the ID field of an event that is to be assigned to the device. You can use the default name or assign another name if multiple devices are in the system.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
4. Select the Connection tab.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 298
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
(For Iconstation CIII only): Use this tab to specify Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stops Bits, and Parity
Chose the Connection Type: Specify Serial or TCP/IP.
For Selenio: SNMP is enabled. Serial connection is currently disabled.
Serial Port: (Active when Serial is selected) Use this entry to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
TCP Connection: (Active when TCP/IP is selected.) Specify the Host IP address. And enter the port number to lowest field.
SNMP Connection: (Selenio only)Specify host, port and community for SNMP connection. SNMP port is 161 by default. Community is responsible for user rights, "public" by default.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 299
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
5. Select Available Cards tab (Selenio only). The Selenio Frame supports different cards. Use this tab to specify currently available cards, their ID (for ADC purposes) and location. Buttons Add/Delete/Edit allow managing available cards.
To Add a card:
Click Add. The Selenio Card Form is displayed.
Specify the following.
• Card Type: Defines type of card. Select from the dropdown list. Currently available cards are:
XD, FS, Encoder, Decoder, MDX, DEM, NET.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 300
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Card ID: Defines ID of card for ADC purposes. This ID doesn’t correlate with any card information in Selenio Frame; it is internal ADC information to be used in macro.
• Card Location: Defines location of card in Selenio Frame. This value is added to OID of a certain parameter to uniquely identify combination "card-parameter" (as OID of a certain parameter should be the same on all cards of same type).
Note. Location should start from dot ("."). If starting it with digit, the dot is added automatically.
• When finished click OK.
6. Select the Communications tab. Use this tab to select Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 301
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
7. Select the Macros tab.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Note: For details on using macros with Selenio device see For Selenio Macros only (see "For Selenio
Note: For details on using macros with the SCTE-104 device driver see For SCTE-104 Macros only.
(see "For SCTE-104 Macros only" on page 313)
Title pane: Lists titles of macros that already exist.
Check if Macro exists: Enable (check) or disable (uncheck) checking for existence of specified macro in the PlayList. When enabled, the "TITLE" field of each event is checked whether the
Macro Template exists in the Universal SerCom or not. If the specified Macro Template does not exist, the event is red colored.
Edit button: Edit an existing macro. Select a macro listed on the Title pane, and then click the
Edit button. The Extended macro Entry form opens, populated with the definition of the selected macro. Make any changes necessary, and then click OK. (See Add button below for a list of dialog parameters.)
Delete button: To delete an existing macro entry, select a macro listed on the Title pane, and then click the Delete button.
Add button: Add a new macro. Click the Add button to open a blank Extended Macro Entry dialog.
To edit an existing macro, select a macro from the defined Macro list and then press Edit; this opens an Extended Macro Entry dialog populated with the macro information.
• Macro Name: Enter a mnemonic to help the operator identify the macro name. The "Macro
Name" is used in TITLE field of PlayList to identify the Macro Template, which should be processed.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 302
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Number of Parameters: Specify the number of playlist parameters. This parameter sets the flexibility of the Macro Template. It defines how many external parameters will be passed to
Macro Template.
• TITLE Field format: This field shows the way the Macro should be used in TITLE field of
PlayList. It is the syntax of the Macro Template.
For example: If "TEST_MACRO:file1:scene2" (without quotes) is entered into the "TITLE field" of PlayList: "file1" is the first parameter passed to the Macro Template, and "scene2" is the second parameter passed to the Macro Template.
IMPORTANT: For 'Data Event with Data': parameters are passed not in a Title field, but they are entered in a special window in Air Client, when creating an event. Each line in this window represents one parameter in the macro.
• Event States: There are 7 states of the event when commands could be sent to the device. o
"Check" state occurs when an event is ‘checked’ (e.g. enters the lookahead) to confirm if the ID’s media is available. o
"Cue" state occurs when the media tries to be cued (prepared). o
"Preroll" state occurs before the "Play" will be started. Preroll time is configurable parameters of PlayList. o
"Play" state occurs when media is playing. o
"End" and "Postroll" goes just after the "Play". Postroll time is configurable parameter for the list too. o
"Skip" state occurs when operator skips the event (for example, by pressing "Skip" button in Air Client).
IMPORTANT: For Universal Sercom Driver v.2 only: 'Data Event' and 'Data Event with Data' are registered with Device Server only if the corresponding macro contains 'play' state, only.
If macro includes any other state (Cue, Preroll, End, Postroll, Skip) - an event is registered, because for this type of events there is only 'play' state.
• Select the required tabs (Check, Cue, Preroll, Play, End, Postroll, Skip) and set up the following parameters: (It is not required to use all seven states, but it is possible to fill in all of them.) o
Command: When selected the Command pane and the Reply Expected option become available. o
Command pane: Specify the macro commands. o
Reply Expected: Enable (check) if a reply is expected. When selected, the following options become available: o
Automatic Reply Processing: Select to enable automatic reply mode. This means that reply processing should be done automatically by driver. This option is useful only if using a custom device driver. o
User defined reply: Select to enable user reply mode. When selected the Reply pane comes available for entry. This means mode means that you define expected reply yourself. In this case Reply pane text field should contain expected reply. You may use hexadecimal values wrapped with braces inside the expected reply. The sequence received from the device is compared against the sequence stored in the text box for this state. If they don’t match, an error occurs. o
Reply timeout: (in frames) Specify how long to wait for a reply before timing out the process.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 303
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations o
Reply pane: Specify the user reply.
About Hexadecimal Values.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Hexadecimal values may be used in the command or reply text fields both for polling and for macro template.
Hexadecimal values are wrapped in braces and within braces may be separated with spaces. If hexadecimal value contains odd number of digits then single digit becomes zero-leading.
For example,
{1 2} is equal to {01 02}
{123}is equal to {01 23}
{1234}is equal to {12 34}
{12 34} is equal to {12 34}
Note: Not used for Selenio.
• Acceptable for cards: (Selenio only) Check the card types that the macro is acceptable for.
Multiple card types can be selected.
• OK button: Click OK to save the Macro Template and close the Extended Macro Entry dialog.
• Cancel button: Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving.
• Apply button: Click Apply to save the Macro Template, but keep the dialog open.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 304
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Apply and New button: Click Apply and New to save the Macro Template and open a clear
Extended Macro Entry dialog for a new Macro Template creation.
8. Select the Diagnostics tab. Use this tab to test commands or reinitialize the device.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 305
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Test Command: enter a test command and then click Send.
Reinitialize button: If required, click to reinitialize the device.
Selenio Note: Currently, Reinit does not perform any operation for the Selenio driver.
For Selenio only: The Diagnostic tab in Selenio configuration window helps to get/set value of any parameter via SNMP protocol. It can be useful if it is necessary to request current value of a certain parameter.
Note. OID should start from digit, not from dot. If you write dot as first symbol, it will be removed automatically.
9. Select the Initialization tab. (For Pubtronic, Universal SerCom Driver, Kaleido K2, Fingertext, Softel
Pres TX, and SCTE-104 devices.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 306
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
For details on SCTE-104 see SCTE driver initialization (on page 319 ).
Configure the following parameters as required:
Command: When selected the Command pane and the Reply Expected option becomes available.
Command pane: Specify the initialization command.
Reply Expected: Enable (check) if a reply is expected. When selected, the following options become available:
• Automatic Reply Processing: Select to enable automatic reply mode. This means that reply processing should be done automatically by driver. This option is useful only if using a custom device driver.
• User defined reply: Select to enable user reply mode. When selected the Reply pane comes available for entry. This means mode means that you define expected reply yourself. In this case Reply pane text field should contain expected reply. You may use hexadecimal values wrapped with braces inside the expected reply. The sequence received from the device is compared against the sequence stored in the text box for this state. If they don’t match, an error occurs.
• Reply timeout: (in frames) Specify how long to wait for a reply before timing out the process.
• Reply pane: Specify the user reply.
10. Select the Polling tab. If your device supports polling command, use this tab to set polling. The
Device Server uses polling to check whether device is alive.
For details on SCTE-104 see SCTE-104 Driver Polling (on page 320 ).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 307
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Polling Enabled: Check to enable polling.
Selenio Note: Always enable polling for the Selenio driver. The driver’s SNMP component doesn’t hold connection with remote device; it just sends SNMP queries when necessary.
Therefore it is important to use polling for determining status of remote device.
Polling Parameters:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 308
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• Interval (Frames): Specify the appropriate polling interval - in frames.
• Device TimeOut (frames): Specify the appropriate polling reply timeout - in frames. This is how long driver waits for reply.
• Command: Enter the polling command or byte sequence, which will be sent with configured interval. You may enter any characters and use hexadecimal representation. For example, you may use {20} instead of space, {0D0A} instead of carriage return. All hexadecimal values should be wrapped with braces.
• OID: (Selenio Only). OID shows what parameter is requested. This parameter should be related to Selenio Frame in general, not to a certain card.
Note. OID should start from digit, not from dot. If a dot is written as the first symbol, it will be removed automatically.
Reply Processing.
• Automatic reply processing: Check to enable automatic reply mode. This means that reply processing is done automatically by driver; any reply from devices is considered as correct reply. This option is useful only if you are using custom device driver.
• User defined reply: Check to enable user-defined reply mode. This means that you define the expected reply yourself. In this case reply pane text field below should contain expected sequence of character, which device will send after polling command is received.
Selenio Note: The value from SNMP reply should be equal to user specified string; otherwise driver supposes that device doesn’t reply.
• Reply pane: Specify the user reply.
11. Select the Global Timeout Settings tab. On this tab enter the reply timeouts in frames for each listed state, and then press "Apply". Now new default values will be used in the Extended Macro Entry.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 309
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
12. Select SCTE 104 Settings tab. This tab specifies several specific settings which are used in commands.
Configure the following parameters as required.
Automation System Index: This parameter represents a unique index of current automation system (please refer to protocol for more details). Default is 0, range 0 – 255 (1 byte)
DPI PID Index: This parameter represents a unique index of device Channel which current driver operates with (please refer to protocol for more details). Default is 0, range 0 – 65535 (2 bytes)
Splice Request Preroll: This parameter represents preroll value for Splice Request commands
(please refer to protocol for more details). Default is 8000 ms, range 0 – 65535 (2 bytes field)
These settings can be specified in pre-defined commands and replies (in macros, initialization and polling) with special designations:
Value
Automation System Index
Designation
$AS
DPI PID Index
Splice Request Preroll
$DP
$PR
Message Number $MN
The last value, Message Number, is a 1-byte field in a command, which should be incremented after each message. When it reaches 255 or driver is reinitialized, it is reset back to 0.
Note: All designations are case-sensitive.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 310
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
13. Select the Latency Adjustments tab. (For Universal Sercom v2 driver only) Use this tab to set latency adjustments in the timing of play, end and skip commands.
Use these parameters to adjust the time (in frames) to send play, end, and skip commands earlier than the crossing point, the end time, and the skip time, respectively.
Note: These options can be operated only on primary, secondary A/V events, or any event that supports duration counter.
The default values of these parameters are zeros.
The maximum number of frames that currently supported is 90, and the minimum value is zero.
The value 90 was chosen to be consistent with other ADC Automation drivers.
14. Select the Supported Audio Modes tab. (For NEC vcvda Audio driver only) Use this tab to define the new supported intervals of Audio modes. When supported Audio intervals are defined, the driver checks AM2 (Audio Mode 2), and AM4 (audio Mode 4) macros for use with all supported intervals.
To add a new interval add the newly define audio interval – in hex – in the "New supported interval" field and then click Add. The new interval is added to the list pane.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 311
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
To delete an interval select the interval in the list pane and click Delete.
15. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
16. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 312
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
For SCTE-104 Macros only
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The SCTE driver has 4 pre-defined macros: "START", "START_IMMED", "END", and "END_IMMED".
Custom macros can be created as required.
• Each macro sends an appropriate splice_request command at Play step: spliceStart_normal
("START"), spliceStart_immediate ("START_IMMED"), spliceEnd_normal ("END"), spliceEnd_immediate ("END_IMMED").
All 4 macros have "Auto" reply processing which means that driver waits for reply from device, but doesn’t parse it (any reply is acceptable).
IMPORTANT: Don’t modify default macros as internal driver logic is based on their structure and may fail in case of changes! Create new macros if required.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 313
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
"START" macro:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 314
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
"START_IMMED" macro
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 315
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
"END" macro
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 316
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
"END_IMMED" macro
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• All 4 macros use splice request command in Multi operation message format.
Field Size Command
Reserved messageSize
2
2
FF FF (always)
00 1E (30) protocol_version
AS_index message_number
DPI_PID_index
SCTE35_protocol_version
1
1
1
2
1
00 (always 00)
$AS (Driver uses AS index from "SCTE 104 Settings" tab)
$MN (Driver increments this field after each sent command in range 0-255)
$DP (Driver uses DPI_PID index from "SCTE 104 Settings" tab)
00 (always 00)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 317
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Field
timestamp() num_ops data
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Operation data table:
Field
opID
Size
2
Start Start_Immed End
01 01 (splice_request_data())
Message Size 2 splice_insert_type 1 splice_event_id 4 unique_program_id 2 pre_roll_time 2
Size Command
1 00 (means message is processed immediately)
1
*
01 (number of commands within data field)
Operation data, see table below
00 0E (14)
1 (spliceStart
_normal)
2 (spliceStart
_immediate
Parameter [1] in macro
Parameter [2] in macro
$PR (Driver uses
Splice Preroll from "SCTE 104
Settings" tab)
00 00
(00:00:00.00)
3 (spliceEnd
_normal)
$PR (Driver uses Splice
Preroll from
"SCTE 104
Settings" tab)
End_Immed
4 (spliceEnd
_immediate)
00 00
(00:00:00.00) break_duration avail_num avails_expected
2
1
1
00 00 (always 00 00)
00 (always 00)
00 (always 00) auto_return_flag 1 00 (always 00)
splice_event_id: Splice event ID is unique ID used to determine whether different messages refer to the same splice. It is used as a macro parameter and is specified in the title of a secondary event.
For example: START:0001
The protocol specifies it as 4-bytes size, so it consists of 4 symbols strictly.
• List_Provided: If the parameter is provided by the Transmission list, this list-provided value is used instead of the driver-generated one.
• Driver Generated: In the scenario where they are not provided as a parameter on the
Transmission List, the driver has the capability to create these IDs and insert them.
For this situation:
The spice_event_id is incremented after each pair of Start/End macro commands.
Start value when the driver is initialized is 0000.
When 9999 is reached, it starts over from 0000.
The default of 0000 when it is not provided
These are used for log troubleshooting purposes, as well as other workflows that require identification of Start/End pairs.
Unique_program_id: Program ID is a unique ID, determined by content originator, that identifies the program during which the avail is occurring; zero value can be used. This is a arameter from the event. If not provided, the value of 00 00 is used.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 318
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Pre_roll_time: The number of milliseconds until the avail occurs. This value is essential only for spliceStart_normal and spliceEnd_normal commands. (Default: 8000ms).
SCTE driver initialization
According to the protocol, the driver sends an initialization command as soon as TCP connection is established.
• Initialization command (init_request_data) and reply to it (init_reponse_data) are in single operation message format.
OpID: Operation ID
AS_index: (automation system index)
DPI_PID_index: (Digital Program Insertion Packet Identifier)
Field
OpID
Size Cmd
2
Description
00 01 init_request_data()
Reply Description
00 02 init_reponse_data() messageSize result
2
2
00 0D 13 bytes length
FF FF always FF FF
00 0D 13 bytes length
00 64 100 – success result_extension 2 protocol_version 1
AS_index 1 message_numbe 1
FF FF always FF FF
00 always 00
FF FF always FF FF
00 always 00
$AS Driver uses AS index from
"SCTE 104 Settings" tab
$AS Driver uses AS index from
"SCTE 104 Settings" tab
$MN Driver increments this field $MN Driver waits for the same
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 319
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Field
r
Size Cmd Description
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager after each sent command in range 0-255
Reply Description
Message Number which was used in last sent command
PI_PID_index 2 FF FF See Note FF FF See Note
Note. Although DPI_PID_index is specified in "SCTE 104 Settings" tab, the driver uses
FF FF value for initialization command, because it is sent to the entire device, not to a single Channel.
data * - -
SCTE-104 Driver Polling
The SCTE driver sends polling commands at an interval of 60 seconds from last processed command. As
USD driver expects frame value of polling interval, 60 seconds are converted to frames depending on current Device Server frame rate.
• Polling command (alive_request_data) and reply to it (alive_reponse_data) are in single operation message format (please refer to protocol and MRD).
Field Size Cmd Description Reply Description
OpID messageSize
2
2
00 03 alive_request_data()
00 15 21 bytes length
00 04 alive_reponse_data()
00 15 21 bytes length
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 320
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Field Size Cmd Description
result 2 result_extension 2 protocol_version 1
AS_index message_numbe r
1
1
FF FF always FF FF
FF FF always FF FF
00 always 00
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
$AS Driver uses AS index from
"SCTE 104 Settings" tab
$MN Driver increments this field after each sent command in range 0-255
FF FF See Note
Reply Description
00 64 100 – success
FF FF always FF FF
00 always 00
$AS Driver uses AS index from
"SCTE 104 Settings" tab
$MN Driver waits for the same
Message Number which was used in last sent command
FF FF See Note DPI_PID_index 2
Note. Although DPI_PID_index is specified in "SCTE 104 Settings" tab, driver uses FF
FF value for polling command, because it is sent to the entire device, not to a single
Channel.
data * - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 321
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
For Selenio Macros only:
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Macro for the Selenio driver is similar to the usual USD macro except for the macro body syntax and acceptable cards configuration.
Acceptable cards: A Selenio macro can contain OID of a certain parameter which is available for one card type and unavailable for others, this is why it is necessary to define what cards macro is acceptable for. This information is then verified by matching the set of acceptable cards with the type of card found by Card ID field of macro. If the found card type isn’t acceptable, secondary event with this macro will be unregistered (red).
Example. Logo1080 macro is acceptable for XD and FS card types (see picture above). In secondary event with this macro user wrote Card ID "Enc001". According to Available Cards information this is Encoder, not XD card. Logo1080 macro can’t be executed for Encoder card, therefore it will be red (unregistered) in Air Client.
Macro syntax: As mentioned above, the Selenio macro can’t be represented as a sequence of bytes/symbols. Therefore it has a special syntax recognized by the Selenio driver.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 322
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Currently five sections comprise the macro body: Card ($CARD), OID ($OID), Action ($ACTION),
Value ($VALUE) and Value type ($TYPE). The name of each section starts with $ symbol to identify that it is a section, not just text. Section names are not case-sensitive.
User can type a section value right in macro body (such as command entries: OID, Action, Value,
Type in the example above) or can assign it with macro parameter (such as AD Card and FS Card in the example above). If assigned, the section will get its value from the title field of the secondary event.
Note. Currently it is possible to define only one SNMP command in each macro step (prepare, cue, preroll, play, etc). If it is necessary to send two or more commands simultaneously at one step, user can add several secondary events, each with appropriate macro, to one primary event in Air Client.
Note: Start OID from digit, not from dot! Currently there is no verification for this in macro body. If anOID is started with a dot, the SNMP query won’t be executed!
Sections description:
Section
$CARD
$OID
$ACTION
Available values
Any string value
(should match one of available cards IDs)
Purpose
Represents Card ID. This is important if there are several cards of one type. It’s also important to construct full parameter address which consists of OID and card location (found by Card ID).
Sec event will be unregistered if:
1. such Card ID doesn’t exist
2. macro is not acceptable for cards of such type
String value representing OID Represents parameter OID
$VALUE
$TYPE
Key words
$GET
$GETNEXT
$GETRESPONSE
$SET
$TRAP
Actually Set is the most important action because driver should modify some parameters on remote device, not just read it.
Actions Get Response and Trap were not tested
Any string value (should represent information of such type as defined in Type section)
Key words
$INT
Defines SNMP action. The most important is $SET.
Sec event will be unregistered if:
1. Value of $ACTION section doesn’t match any key word.
2. Value of $ACTION section is $SET, but section $VALUE or $TYPE is empty
Defines new value for $SET action. Can be empty for other actions.
Defines type of value for $SET action.
Sec event will be unregistered if:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 323
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Section Available values
$STR
$NULL and others defined later
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Purpose
1. Value doesn’t match any key word.
Reply processing: There are three ways to process replies to macro commands.
• Reply isn’t expected. Selenio driver just sends command to device and doesn’t pay attention to the reply, no matter if reply is received or not.
• Automatic reply processing. Selenio driver sends SNMP command and waits for reply. If any reply is received, the behavior is correct. If no reply is received, Selenio driver supposes that an error occurs and shows appropriate message in Air Client. Type of error depends on macro step (cue, preroll, play, ...).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 324
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
• User defined reply. Selenio driver sends SNMP command and waits for reply. If reply is exactly the same as defined by user, this is correct behavior. In all other cases Selenio driver supposes that an error occurs and shows appropriate message in Air Client. Type of error depends on macro step (cue, preroll, play, ...).
It should be mentioned, that SNMP reply consists of OID and its value. For "user defined reply" Selenio compares user specified string with value from SNMP reply.
In the example above Selenio will reply
1.3.6.1.4.1.290.9.3.3.21.3.1.3360.1.1.6: 1
OID + Card locationValue
The driver takes only Value (1) for comparison with user defined reply. Therefore user should write "1" in the appropriate field of macro window.
Note. Automatic reply allows verifying that device really replied and doesn’t require re additional knoledge from user.
Default macro set: Selenio driver provides default macros which are available just after you add
Selenio to available devices in Config Tool.
• Macros Logo1080, Logo525, Logo625, Logo720 correspond to requirement: "Use the Selenio
FS/XD logo in the same way as other keyers".
• Macro SET can be used for requirement: "Based on current/next event text, set related values in the encoder or mux".
Macro name Description
Logo1080 Step "Play" – enable raster 1080 logo
Step "Stop" – disable
Parameters Acceptable for cards
Card ID XD,
FS
Reply processing
Automatic
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 325
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Macro name Description
Logo525
Logo625
Logo720
SET
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Parameters Acceptable for cards
raster 1080 logo
Step "Play" – enable raster 525 logo
Step "Stop" – disable raster 525 logo
Step "Play" – enable raster 625 logo
Step "Stop" – disable raster 625 logo
Step "Play" – enable raster 720 logo
Step "Stop" – disable raster 720 logo
Assignes new value to any parameter on any card
Card ID
Card ID
Card ID
Card ID,
OID,
Value,
Value type
XD,
FS
XD,
FS
XD,
FS
All
Reply processing
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Barcode Reader Configuration (General)
Barcode readers or barcode wands are used to identify tapes by a barcode label. Generally, they are used in conjunction with cart machines. Barcode readers are shared by all lists, although in special cases they may be assigned to a single list.
The following is an example Barcode Reader configuration. Your Barcode Reader may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a Barcode Reader
1. Under Barcode Readers in the right pane, select a device (e.g. Unitech) and drag-n-drop it to the left
pane. For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To
Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. In the left pane, select a Barcode Reader device, right-click and from the popup menu select
Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 326
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: Enter a name for the VTR to help you identify the VTR during event transmission.
The name can have up to 16 characters. The device name has no relation to the ID of any tape inserted in the VTR.
Odetics Type Label Length: Use spin arrows to specify the label length.
4. Select Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
6. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 327
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
VChip Encoder Configuration (General)
The following is an example VChip Encoder device configuration. Your device may have different options and the selection of configuration tabs may be different for that device. If necessary, refer to the User
Notes for your device for complete details on how to configure it.
To Configure a VChip Encoder Device
1. Under VCHIP Encoders in the Available pane (right pane), select a device (e.g. Norpak) and drag-ndrop it to the Configured pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device see: To Assign a Device
to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
3. Select the General tab.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters. When an event is threaded, an extra character - the head number - is added to the end of the name.
This name is used in the ID field of an event that is assigned to the device. The default name can be used or another name assigned, if multiple devices are in the system.
ID Match Name: The ID match name identifies the disk port in secondary events, where the device name is played in the ID field. The default name is the same name you selected as the device name. Enter the name by using up to four characters. When an event is threaded, a fifth character - the head number - is added to the name.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 328
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
The name is also used to identify the disk port used to execute secondary data events. If a disk port’s name matches the ID of a secondary data event, the event is executed.
Run at Preroll: Check to enable sending play command at preroll. (For Evertz devices this option is typically unchecked.))
4. Select the Serial Port tab. Use this tab to connect the driver to the ADC’s serial COM port that the device is physically connected. Click the down arrow button to select from a list of available serial ports.
5. Select the Communications tab. As required, configure the following parameters as required: Baud
Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 329
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
6. Select the Diagnostics tab. If required, click Reinitialize button to reinitialize the device.
7. Select the Regional tab. Use this tab to set up Rating System, Time Zone, and Day Light Savings.
Configure the following parameters as required:
Rating System: From the dropdown select the rating system to be used. The actual codes to be used are dependent on the Country setting of the device.
Time Zone:
• Hours / Minutes: Specify hours and minutes as required for the timezone.
• Uses Daylight Savings Time: Check to enable if daylight savings is used.
• Send Time Zone Packets: Check to enable if time zone packets are sent.
8. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 330
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
9. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Database Update Redirector Support
Configuration (General)
Database Update Redirectors are software devices that propagate changes to database records to events on lists running on multiple Device Servers.
For Example: If an operator changes the database record for ID 1234 at a Media Client logged into
Device Server "A", any instances of ID 1234 on lists running on Device Server "A" is immediately updated with the new information.
• If a Database Update Redirector is not configured, any instances of ID 1234 on lists running on
Device Servers "B" or "C" (on the same LAN) will not be updated.
• If a Database Update Redirector is configured on Device Server "A", changes to database records will update events on lists running on Device Servers "B" and "C" as well.
Note: All devices, whether they are media devices, non-media devices or special devices (such as
Archives, Proxy FTPs, or Redistributors), must be assigned to a device channel in the Configured Devices window of the Configuration Manager.
The following is an example Database Update Redirector configuration. If necessary, refer to the User
Notes for your device for complete configuration details.
To Configure Database Update Redirector Support
1. Under Database Support in the Available pane (right pane), select a device (e.g. Database Update
Redirector) and drag-n-drop it to the Configured pane (left pane). For details on assigning a device
see: To Assign a Device to a Device Channel (see "To Configure GPI Control" on page 46).
Once a device has been assigned to a device channel, it may be configured for specific options.
2. Select the device in the left pane, right-click and from the popup menu select Properties. The configuration dialog is displayed for this device. Use the left and right arrows at the upper right to scroll through the other tabs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 331
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
3. Select the General tab.
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
Configure the following parameters as required:
Device Name: The device name identifies the disk port. Enter the name by using up to 16 characters.
4. When finished click Apply, then click OK.
5. From the Configured Devices window select File> Save Devices. The current configuration is written to the Device Server’s configuration files in the "C:\Server" folder on the Device Server.
Configuring Moxa NPorts and Legacy Serial
Ports
Device Server 12.23 and higher support a hybrid environment where both Moxa and the serial cards are supported by adding a form to the Config Tool that allows changing the number of legacy/Moxa ports number forported drivers
Note: These settings are available for all drivers that require port connections.
Configure Ports Count
Use the following procedure to configure Port Counts.
1. Launch Config Tool > Configured Devices > View > Ports Count.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 332
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
2. Ports Count
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
3. Specify as required.
Standard Card: Specify Legacy (RS-422) serial ports. (Range: 0-64)
Moxa NPort: Specify the moxa teminal server ports.
(Range: 0 – ‘Total avaliable Moxa NPorts’). The total number of available Moxa NPorts is determined by the number of Moxa Terminal Servers configured at a site.
• Device Server can be used with Moxa only after the number of Moxa ports setting is configured
• Moxa ports have "Moxa" prefix on the port assignment tab of device configuration form
Review Ports Usage
Use the following procedure to review Ports Usage.
Port Usage
1. Config Tool > Configured Devices > View > Ports Usage
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 333
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
2. Port Usage form. It shows legacy ports with "Serial" prefix and Moxa ports with "Moxa" prefix.
Device Driver Configuration
Use the following procedure when configuring Device Drivers that require port connections.
1. "Driver Name" > Properties
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 334
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
2. Serial Port tab (e.g. Ex.ID Video disk) This form displays the number of Legacy (RS-422) serial ports and Moxa terminal server ports that were configured
3. Click OK. The Number of ports is saved in ADC1000NT.ini file.
About Warning Messages
Warning/Error messages are displayed when the number of ports cannot be changed because some of ports are in use. The user is warned regarding port changes, if :
• The number of ports is about to decrease
• Some of ports that about to be removed are currently used by some device drivers.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 335
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
In this scenario, the user has to remove serial ports from drivers manually and only then decrease number of ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Configuring AB4 Ports
Versio Device Server 12.22.40 and higher supports a hybrid environment where both AB4 and the serial cards are supported by adding a form to the Config Tool that allows changing the number of legacy/AB4 ports number for ported drivers
Note: These settings are available for all drivers that require port connections.
Example device config
To provide a general reference, the following settings are used to support a Panacea router using the
AB4 card:
Set "No Port" in Panacea properties
Configured Devices -> Ports Count -> set "Standard Card" = 0 "AB4 Card" = 8
Set required AB4 port in Panacea properties
Ports Count
1. Launch Config Tool > Configured Devices > View > Ports Count.
7-August-2015 | Page 336
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
2. Ports Count
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
3. Specify as required.
Standard Card: Specify Legacy (RS-422) serial ports. (Range: 0-64)
AB4 Card: Specify the card ports. (Range: 0 – ‘Total avaliable Ports’).
Port Usage
1. Config Tool > Configured Devices > View > Ports Usage
2. Port Usage form. It shows AB4 ports with "AB4" prefix. This is illustrated in the following image.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 337
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations
Device Driver Configuration
Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
1. "Driver Name" > Properties
2. Serial Port tab: (e.g. VTR). This form displays the number of Legacy (RS-422) serial ports and AB4 ports that were configured.
3. Click OK. The Number of ports is saved in ADC1000NT.ini file.
About Warning Messages
Warning/Error messages are displayed when the number of ports cannot be changed because some of ports are in use. The user is warned regarding port changes, if :
• The number of ports is about to decrease
• Some of ports that about to be removed are currently used by some device drivers.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 338
ADC™ Device Server and Config Tool
Installation and Operations Configuring Devices using Configuration Manager
In this scenario, the user has to remove serial ports from drivers manually and only then decrease number of ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. 7-August-2015 | Page 339
تنزيل
إعلان